WF-8590 User's Guide
Contents
WF-8590 User's Guide............................................................................................................................... 15
Product Basics ..........................................................................................................................................
Using the Control Panel .....................................................................................................................
Control Panel Buttons and Lights ..................................................................................................
Status Icon Information .............................................................................................................
Status Button Information .........................................................................................................
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel .......................................................................
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen...................................................................................
Using Presets............................................................................................................................
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control) ......................................................................
Changing LCD Screen Language..................................................................................................
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds ....................................................................................................
Adjusting the Screen Brightness....................................................................................................
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting ..................................................................................
Product Parts Locations .....................................................................................................................
Product Parts - Front .....................................................................................................................
Product Parts - Inside ....................................................................................................................
Product Parts - Back......................................................................................................................
Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings ...........................................................................
Changing the Eco Mode Settings ..................................................................................................
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings ...............................................................................................
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings ........................................................................................
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More .........................................................
Using Epson Email Print ...............................................................................................................
Using the Epson iPrint Mobile App ................................................................................................
Using Epson Remote Print ...........................................................................................................
Using Epson Scan to Cloud...........................................................................................................
Using AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................
Using Google Cloud Print ...................................................................................................................
Setting Up Google Cloud Print on a Chromebook .........................................................................
3
16
16
17
18
19
20
22
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
33
35
36
36
37
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
43
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking........................................................................................................................
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup.........................................................................................................
Selecting Wireless Network Settings From the Control Panel .......................................................
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup ....................................................................................................................
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode ...........................................................................................................
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).............................................................................................................
Using WPS to Connect to a Network .............................................................................................
Printing a Network Status Sheet.........................................................................................................
Changing or Updating Network Connections .....................................................................................
Accessing the Web Config Utility ...................................................................................................
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection......................................................................
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection......................................................
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router ................................................................................................
Configuring Email Server Settings.................................................................................................
Disabling Wi-Fi Features ...............................................................................................................
45
45
46
48
49
52
52
53
54
54
55
55
55
56
57
Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing....................................................
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings .......................................................................
PDL Print Configuration Options....................................................................................................
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings ............................................................................
Printer Language and Interface Options........................................................................................
Printing a PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet ...........................................................................................
59
59
60
63
64
65
Loading Paper ...........................................................................................................................................
Loading Paper in the Cassette ...........................................................................................................
Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot ..............................................................
Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot ......................................................................................
Paper Loading Capacity .....................................................................................................................
Available Epson Papers .....................................................................................................................
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software..............................................................................
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel ...........................................................
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel .............................................................................................
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator................................................................................
Selecting the Default Printer Settings ............................................................................................
Paper Source Settings Options.................................................................................................
66
66
69
73
75
77
79
80
81
82
82
84
4
Setting the Universal Print Settings ............................................................................................... 84
Universal Print Settings Options ............................................................................................... 85
Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes ......................................................................... 86
Installing the Optional Cabinet....................................................................................................... 87
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units ................................................................................. 94
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows................................................................. 101
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - OS X ...................................................................... 102
Placing Originals on the Product ........................................................................................................... 104
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass ........................................................................................... 104
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder ...................................................................... 105
Copying .................................................................................................................................................... 108
Copying Documents or Photos......................................................................................................... 108
Copying Options............................................................................................................................... 109
Printing from a Computer .......................................................................................................................
Printing with Windows ......................................................................................................................
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows ....................................................................................
Paper Source Options - Windows ...........................................................................................
Print Quality Options - Windows .............................................................................................
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows...................................................................................
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows ...................................................................
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows...............................................................................
Print Density Adjustments - Windows .....................................................................................
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows ...........................................................
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows..........................................................................
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows..................................................................
Header/Footer Settings - Windows .........................................................................................
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows.........................................................................................
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows ......................................................................................
Extended Settings - Windows .................................................................................................
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows...............................................................................
Locking Printer Settings - Windows .............................................................................................
Administrator Lock Settings ....................................................................................................
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing .............................................................................
5
112
112
112
115
115
116
116
119
119
120
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
131
132
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows.................................................................................. 133
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens ....................................................... 134
Changing Automatic Update Options .......................................................................................... 135
Printing with OS X ............................................................................................................................ 136
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X ......................................................................................... 137
Paper Source Options - OS X ................................................................................................. 141
Print Quality Options - OS X.................................................................................................... 141
Print Options - OS X................................................................................................................ 142
Selecting Page Setup Settings - OS X......................................................................................... 142
Selecting Print Layout Options - OS X ......................................................................................... 143
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - OS X ......................................................................... 144
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - OS X ......................................................... 145
Managing Color - OS X................................................................................................................ 146
Color Matching and Color Options - OS X............................................................................... 147
Selecting Printing Preferences - OS X......................................................................................... 148
Printing Preferences - OS X.................................................................................................... 149
Printing Your Document or Photo - OS X..................................................................................... 150
Checking Print Status - OS X .................................................................................................. 150
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows................................................................. 151
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ................................................................ 152
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ................................... 156
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows .................................... 158
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ........... 160
Selecting Maintenance Options - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows.................................. 162
Extended Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ................................................. 163
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows.................................. 164
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ............................................. 166
Epson Universal Print Driver Lock Settings............................................................................. 168
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows............................................. 169
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ........................................................ 172
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ........................................................ 172
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows ....................... 172
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows ...................................... 174
6
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - PostScript Printer Software - Windows ............. 177
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows.................................... 178
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X .............................................................. 179
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X ............................................................... 180
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - OS X.............................. 180
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - OS X ............................................ 181
Selecting Page Setup Settings - PostScript Printer Software - OS X ........................................... 187
Selecting Print Layout Options - PostScript Printer Software - OS X ........................................... 188
Sizing Printed Images - PostScript Printer Software - OS X ....................................................... 189
Managing Color - PostScript Printer Software - OS X ................................................................. 189
Printing Your Document or Photo - PostScript Printer Software - OS X....................................... 190
Checking Print Status - PostScript Printer Software - OS X ................................................... 190
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button...................................................................................... 191
Scanning ..................................................................................................................................................
Starting a Scan.................................................................................................................................
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel ........................................................................
Scanning to Email ...................................................................................................................
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server..........................................................................
Control Panel Scanning Options .............................................................................................
Creating Contacts for Scanning ..............................................................................................
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs............................................................................................
Starting a Scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture ............................................
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan Icon ................................................................................
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program...................................................................................
Selecting Epson Scan Settings ........................................................................................................
Scan Modes.................................................................................................................................
Selecting the Scan Mode.............................................................................................................
Scanning in Office Mode..............................................................................................................
Available Document Source Settings - Office Mode................................................................
Selecting a Scan Area - Office Mode ......................................................................................
Available Image Adjustments - Office Mode ...........................................................................
Scanning in Professional Mode ...................................................................................................
Available Document Source Settings - Professional Mode .....................................................
7
192
192
192
194
196
198
200
202
203
206
208
210
210
211
211
214
214
217
218
221
Available Image Types - Professional Mode ...........................................................................
Selecting a Scan Area - Professional Mode ............................................................................
Available Image Adjustments - Professional Mode .................................................................
Selecting a Scan Size - Professional Mode.............................................................................
Image Preview Guidelines...........................................................................................................
Scan Resolution Guidelines ........................................................................................................
Selecting Scan File Settings ........................................................................................................
Available Scanned File Types and Optional Settings..............................................................
Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture.......................................................................................
Available Scan Settings - OS X Image Capture...........................................................................
Scanning Special Projects................................................................................................................
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service .....................................................................
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files........................................................................
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning - Windows..............................................................
221
222
225
227
230
230
232
234
235
237
238
238
240
241
Faxing.......................................................................................................................................................
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine ..............................................................................
Setting Up Fax Features ..................................................................................................................
Setting Up Basic Fax Features ....................................................................................................
Selecting Your Country or Region...........................................................................................
Selecting the Date and Time...................................................................................................
Using the Fax Setup Wizard ...................................................................................................
Selecting the Line Type...........................................................................................................
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer ..................................................................................
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings ................................................................................................
User Default Settings - Fax .....................................................................................................
Send Settings - Fax.................................................................................................................
Receive Settings - Fax ............................................................................................................
Output Settings - Fax ..............................................................................................................
Basic Settings - Fax ................................................................................................................
Security Settings - Fax ............................................................................................................
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Windows............................................................
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - OS X..................................................................
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups.........................................................................................
243
243
249
249
249
251
253
255
257
259
261
262
262
263
265
266
267
268
269
8
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel.................................................................
Creating a Contact ..................................................................................................................
Editing or Deleting a Contact ..................................................................................................
Creating a Contact Group .......................................................................................................
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group........................................................................................
Setting Up Speed/Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility - Windows ............................................
Setting Up Speed/Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility - OS X ..................................................
Sending Faxes .................................................................................................................................
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel...........................................................................
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History ......................................................
Fax Sending Options ..............................................................................................................
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time .........................................................................................
Sending a Fax on Demand .....................................................................................................
Sending a Stored Fax .............................................................................................................
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone ...............................................................
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows ..........................................................................
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - OS X.................................................................................
Receiving Faxes...............................................................................................................................
Fax Reception .............................................................................................................................
Receiving Faxes Automatically ...................................................................................................
Receiving Faxes Manually...........................................................................................................
Forwarding Received Faxes........................................................................................................
Receiving a Fax by Polling ..........................................................................................................
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen ...............................................................................................
Checking Fax Status .......................................................................................................................
Printing Fax Reports.........................................................................................................................
Fax Report Options .....................................................................................................................
270
270
272
273
275
277
281
283
283
283
285
287
288
289
291
292
294
297
297
298
298
299
301
301
302
303
303
Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product .........................................................................................
Inserting a USB Flash Drive .............................................................................................................
USB Device Photo File Specifications .........................................................................................
Removing a USB Flash Drive...........................................................................................................
Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen .....................................................................................
Printing JPEG Photos..................................................................................................................
305
305
305
306
306
306
9
Printing TIFF and PDF Files ....................................................................................................... 308
Photo Adjustment Options - Device Mode ................................................................................... 308
Print Setting Options - Device Mode............................................................................................ 309
Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive .......................................................................................... 310
Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer ................................................. 310
Transferring Files from a USB Flash Drive to Your Computer ..................................................... 311
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes............................................................................... 313
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status................................................................................. 313
Checking Cartridge Status on the LCD Screen............................................................................ 313
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with Windows ................................................ 314
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with OS X....................................................... 317
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box .................................................................... 319
Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part Numbers...................................................................... 319
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges............................................................................................ 320
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges ................................................................... 323
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Windows ................................................................... 323
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - OS X ......................................................................... 324
Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows ......................................................................................... 326
Replacing the Maintenance Box....................................................................................................... 326
Adjusting Print Quality............................................................................................................................
Print Head Maintenance...................................................................................................................
Print Head Nozzle Check.............................................................................................................
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel .........................................................
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility ......................................................................
Print Head Cleaning ....................................................................................................................
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ......................................................
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility...................................................................
Print Head Alignment .......................................................................................................................
Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ............................................................
Aligning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility.........................................................................
Cleaning the Paper Guide ................................................................................................................
329
329
329
330
332
333
334
335
337
337
339
341
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................. 343
Cleaning Your Product ..................................................................................................................... 343
10
Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................................... 346
Solving Problems .................................................................................................................................... 348
Checking for Software Updates........................................................................................................ 348
Product Status Messages ................................................................................................................ 349
Status Menu Error Codes ................................................................................................................. 350
Running a Product Check ................................................................................................................ 354
Resetting Control Panel Defaults ..................................................................................................... 356
Solving Setup Problems ................................................................................................................... 357
Product Does Not Turn On or Off................................................................................................. 357
Noise After Ink Installation ........................................................................................................... 357
Software Installation Problems .................................................................................................... 358
Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 358
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point .................................................. 359
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network................................................................. 360
Product Does Not Appear in OS X Printer Window...................................................................... 361
Cannot Print Over a Network....................................................................................................... 361
Cannot Scan Over a Network ...................................................................................................... 363
Solving Copying Problems ............................................................................................................... 364
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies.................................................................................. 364
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While............................................................................. 364
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder.................................................... 364
Solving Paper Problems................................................................................................................... 365
Paper Feeding Problems............................................................................................................. 365
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A) ................................................................................ 367
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1) .............................................................. 368
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2) .............................................................. 368
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4).................................................................. 371
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)............................................................................ 372
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit ....................... 375
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F) ............................................................. 377
Paper Ejection Problems ............................................................................................................. 381
Solving PostScript Printing Problems ............................................................................................... 381
Nothing Prints Using the Postscript Printing Software ................................................................. 381
11
Documents Print Incorrectly Using the Postscript Printing Software............................................
Accessing Printer Properties - Postscript - Windows ...................................................................
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer.....................................................................................
Nothing Prints ..............................................................................................................................
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar ...................................................................
Printing is Slow ............................................................................................................................
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems ....................................................................................
Inverted Image.............................................................................................................................
Too Many Copies Print ................................................................................................................
Blank Pages Print ........................................................................................................................
Incorrect Margins on Printout.......................................................................................................
Incorrect Characters Print............................................................................................................
Incorrect Image Size or Position ..................................................................................................
Slanted Printout ...........................................................................................................................
Solving Print Quality Problems .........................................................................................................
White or Dark Lines in Printout ....................................................................................................
Blurry or Smeared Printout ..........................................................................................................
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps .............................................................................................
Grainy Printout.............................................................................................................................
Incorrect Colors ...........................................................................................................................
Solving Scanning Problems .............................................................................................................
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly .........................................................................
Cannot Start Epson Scan ............................................................................................................
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems .......................................................................................
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only.............................................................................................
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images...............................................................................
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked ................................................................................
Image is Distorted or Blurry .........................................................................................................
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges ........................................................................................
Image is Too Dark .......................................................................................................................
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image ....................................................................
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image ............................................................................................
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors.................................................................
12
382
382
383
383
384
385
386
386
387
387
388
388
388
389
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
395
396
396
397
397
398
398
398
398
399
399
399
Scan Area is Not Adjustable in Thumbnail Preview ..................................................................... 400
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped ........................................................................................... 400
Solving Faxing Problems.................................................................................................................. 400
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes ................................................................................................... 401
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product ........................................ 402
Fax Memory Full Error Appears................................................................................................... 403
Sent Fax Quality is Poor .............................................................................................................. 403
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size ................................................................................... 404
Received Fax Quality is Poor ...................................................................................................... 405
Received Fax is Not Printed ........................................................................................................ 405
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems .................................................................................................. 405
Cannot View or Print from a USB Flash Drive.............................................................................. 405
Cannot Save Files on a USB Flash Drive .................................................................................... 406
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Flash Drive ................................................................. 406
When to Uninstall Your Product Software ........................................................................................ 407
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows .................................................................................... 407
Uninstalling Product Software - OS X .......................................................................................... 408
Where to Get Help............................................................................................................................ 409
Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................
Windows System Requirements ......................................................................................................
OS X System Requirements.............................................................................................................
Scanning Specifications ...................................................................................................................
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications ..........................................................................
Fax Specifications ............................................................................................................................
Paper Specifications ........................................................................................................................
Printable Area Specifications ...........................................................................................................
Ink Cartridge Specifications..............................................................................................................
Dimension Specifications .................................................................................................................
Electrical Specifications ...................................................................................................................
Environmental Specifications ...........................................................................................................
Interface Specifications ....................................................................................................................
External USB Device Specifications.................................................................................................
Network Interface Specifications ......................................................................................................
13
410
410
411
411
412
412
413
415
416
416
417
418
418
419
419
Safety and Approvals Specifications ................................................................................................
PS3 Mode Fonts...............................................................................................................................
PCL5 Mode Fonts ............................................................................................................................
PCL6 Mode Fonts ............................................................................................................................
Symbol Sets .....................................................................................................................................
420
421
423
425
427
Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 436
General Product Safety Instructions................................................................................................. 436
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions.................................................................................................. 438
LCD Screen Safety Instructions................................................................................................... 439
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions ..................................................................................... 439
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions ................................................................................... 439
Cabinet Safety Instructions.......................................................................................................... 440
FCC Compliance Statement............................................................................................................. 440
Software Notice................................................................................................................................ 443
Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................... 491
Copyright Notice............................................................................................................................... 491
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment.............................................................................................. 492
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials................................................... 493
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products ............................................... 493
Copyright Attribution .................................................................................................................... 493
14
WF-8590 User's Guide
Welcome to the WF-8590 User's Guide.
For a printable PDF copy of this guide, click here.
15
Product Basics
See these sections to learn about the basic features of your product.
Using the Control Panel
Product Parts Locations
Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Using AirPrint
Using Google Cloud Print
Using the Control Panel
See these sections to learn about the control panel and select control panel settings.
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control)
Changing LCD Screen Language
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting
Parent topic: Product Basics
16
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
1
The
2
The
3
The
4
The
Reset button
5
The
Stop button
6
The LCD screen
7
The
8
The Status button and lights
9
The numeric keypad
10
The C clear button
11
The
B&W button
12
The
Color button
power button and light
home button
Interrupt button
back button
17
Status Icon Information
Status Button Information
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Status Icon Information
Your product may display status icons on the LCD screen for certain product status conditions. Press
to view or change the current network settings.
Icons
Description
Displays additional information or instructions, such as on loading paper or placing a
document.
A document is in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).
One or more of the ink cartridges are running low on ink or the maintenance box is nearly full.
Press the Status button to open the Status Menu, select Printer Information, and check the
status of the consumables.
One or more of the ink cartridges are expended or the maintenance box is full.
Press the Status button to open the Status Menu, select Printer Information, and check the
status of the consumables.
Unread or unprinted fax data is stored in the product. If you have set up the product to save
received faxes on a computer or external storage device, this icon may also indicate that
received faxes have not been saved on the computer or storage device.
Fax memory usage.
Fax memory is full. Delete received faxes you have already read or printed. If you have set up
the product to save received faxes on a computer or external storage device, turn on the
computer or connect the storage device to the product.
A Wi-Fi or an Ethernet connection is being processed.
No Ethernet connection.
An Ethernet connection has been established.
18
Icons
Description
No Wi-Fi connection.
A Wi-Fi network error has occurred or the product is searching for a connection.
A Wi-Fi connection has been established. The number of bars indicates the connection's signal
strength.
An Ad hoc connection has been established.
A Wi-Fi Direct mode connection has been established.
A Simple AP mode connection has been established.
Access to the product's functions are restricted to authorized users. Press the icon to log in to
the printer. (You need to enter a user name and password.) Contact your administrator if you
do not know the login information.
Access to the product's functions are restricted to authorized users and a user is currently
logged in. Press the icon to log out.
Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Status Button Information
Press the Status button on the control panel to view the current product and job status.
Function
Description
Printer Information
Displays the status of consumables and any errors that have occurred
with the product. Select the error from the list to display the error
message.
Job Monitor
Displays the current job and any jobs waiting to be processed.
Job History
Displays the job history and any error codes for failed jobs in the
history.
Job Storage
Select Inbox to display received faxes stored in the product's history.
19
Function
Description
Confidential Job
Displays jobs that require a password to print.
Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
You can set an administrator password to lock the following settings and prevent them from being
changed:
• System Administration Setup settings
• Eco mode settings
• Presets
• Contacts
Note: For more information on administration settings, see the Administrator's Guide.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select Admin Settings.
4. Select Admin Password.
5. Select Register.
20
You see a screen like this:
6. Use the displayed keyboard to enter a password, and press
.
7. Enter your password again to confirm.
8. Select OK.
9. Select Lock Setting and select On.
When the control panel is locked, you must enter the password to access any of the locked settings.
Note: If you forget your password, contact Epson for assistance.
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Using Presets
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Related tasks
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control)
21
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Follow these guidelines to enter characters for passwords and other settings.
• To move the cursor, select
or
.
• To change the case of letters, select
.
• To delete the previous character, select
.
• To enter numbers or symbols, select
• To enter a space, select
.
.
Parent topic: Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Using Presets
You can save frequently used copy, fax, and scan settings as presets. This lets you easily reuse them
whenever necessary.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change presets, contact your
administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Presets. Enter the Administrator password, if necessary.
22
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Add New.
4. Select the function for which you want to set up a preset.
You see the main screen for that function, such as the Copy screen:
5. Select the settings you want to save and select Save.
23
You see a screen like this:
6. Use the displayed keyboard to enter a name for the preset and press
.
7. Select Save.
When you copy, fax, or scan, you can use the preset by selecting Presets and selecting your preset
from the list.
Parent topic: Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control)
Using Web Config Access Control Settings, you can restrict product features for individual users to
prevent misuse of the product. Restricted features require the user to enter an ID and password on the
product control panel.
After feature restrictions have been set up in Web Config, you must enable them using the product
control panel.
Note: For more information on administration settings, see the Administrator's Guide.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
24
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration.
4. Scroll down and select Security Settings.
5. Select Access Control.
6. Select On.
7. Select whether to allow Jobs Without Authentication.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Related tasks
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning - Windows
Changing LCD Screen Language
You can change the language used on the LCD screen.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
25
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration.
4. Select Common Settings.
5. Scroll down and select Language.
6. Select a language.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
26
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration.
4. Select Common Settings.
5. Select Sound.
6. Select Button Press.
7. Press
to decrease or
to increase the sound.
8. Select OK to exit.
Note: You can also adjust the Sound Type and the sound level for various product functions.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
27
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration.
4. Select Common Settings.
5. Select LCD Brightness.
6. Adjust the screen brightness by selecting a brightness level or by pressing the left or right arrow
button.
7. Select OK to exit.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting
The Operation Time Out setting causes the LCD screen to return to the Home screen after a few minutes
of inactivity. This feature is enabled by default, but you can turn it off.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
28
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration.
4. Select Common Settings.
5. Scroll down and select Operation Time Out.
6. Select Off.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Product Parts Locations
See these sections to identify the parts on your product.
Product Parts - Front
Product Parts - Inside
Product Parts - Back
Parent topic: Product Basics
29
Product Parts - Front
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use
these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1
ADF cover (F)
2
ADF input tray (F)
30
3
Edge guide
4
ADF output tray
5
Edge guides
6
Front paper feed slot (B2)
7
Paper cassette 1 (C1)
8
Optional cassettes 2 to 4 (C2 to C4)
9
Optional cabinet
1
Edge guides
31
2
Paper support
3
Rear paper feed slot (B1)
4
Feeder guard
5
Output tray
6
Edge guides
7
Paper cassette
Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
32
Product Parts - Inside
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use
these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1
Document cover
33
2
Scanner glass
3
Control panel
4
USB Type A port for external devices
5
Print head
6
Front cover (A)
Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
34
Product Parts - Back
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use
these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1
Rear cover 2 (D2)
2
AC inlet
3
Rear cover 1 (D1)
4
Rear cover (E)
5
Service USB port (do not remove sticker)
35
6
Line port
7
EXT port
8
LAN port
9
USB port
Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings
Your product enters sleep mode automatically and turns off the LCD screen if it is not used for a period
of time. You can make the time period shorter and select other options to save energy and resources.
Changing the Eco Mode Settings
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
Parent topic: Product Basics
Changing the Eco Mode Settings
You can use the product's control panel to change the Eco Mode settings.
Note: The Sleep Timer setting in Eco Mode overrides the Sleep Timer setting in the Common Settings
menu. If you turn on Eco Mode, 2-sided copying is selected by default. The Eco Mode setting can be
locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for
assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Eco Mode. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
36
You see a screen like this:
3. Select On.
4. Select Configure.
5. Change any settings as necessary.
6. Select OK to exit.
Parent topic: Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings
Related tasks
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
You can adjust the time period before your product enters sleep mode and turns off the LCD screen.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance. The Sleep Timer setting in Eco Mode overrides this Sleep
Timer setting.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select Common Settings.
5. Select Sleep Timer.
37
You see a screen like this:
6. Do one of the following:
• Press the – or + icons to reduce or increase the number of minutes.
• Press the number of minutes on the LCD screen, select the number of minutes from the on-screen
keypad, and press
.
7. Select OK.
Parent topic: Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings
Related tasks
Changing the Eco Mode Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
You can have the product turn off automatically if it is not used for a specified period of time.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
38
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select Common Settings.
5. Select Power Off Timer.
6. Select a time period between 30minutes and 12h (12 hours).
Parent topic: Using Eco Mode and Other Power Saving Settings
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
You can print documents, photos, emails, and web pages from your home, office, or even across the
globe. You can use your smartphone, tablet, or computer. Epson offers these solutions to print from
anywhere: Epson Email Print, Epson iPrint Mobile App, Epson Remote Print, and Epson Scan to Cloud.
Using Epson Email Print
Using the Epson iPrint Mobile App
Using Epson Remote Print
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
Parent topic: Product Basics
Using Epson Email Print
With Epson Email Print, you can print from any device that can send email, such as your smartphone,
tablet, or laptop. Just activate your product's unique email address. When you want to print, attach a
PDF, Microsoft Office document, or photo to an email and send it to your product.
1. Set up your product for network printing as described in this manual. See the link below.
39
2. If you did not already set up Email Print when you installed your product software, visit
epson.com/connect to learn more about Email Print, check compatibility, and get detailed setup
instructions.
3. Send an email with attachments to your product's Email Print address.
Note: Both the email and any attachments print by default. You can change these printing options by
logging into your Epson Connect account.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using the Epson iPrint Mobile App
Use this free Apple and Android app to print to nearby Epson networked products. The Epson iPrint
Mobile App lets you print PDFs, Microsoft Office documents, photos, and web pages over a wireless
network. You can even scan and save a file on your device, send it as an email, or upload it to an online
service such as Box, Dropbox, Evernote, or Google Drive.
1. Set up your product on a network as described in this manual. See the link below.
2. Visit epson.com/connect to learn more about Epson iPrint and check the compatibility of your mobile
device.
3. Download Epson iPrint from the Apple App Store or Google Play.
4. Connect your mobile device to the same wireless network that your product is using.
5. Print from your mobile device to your Epson product.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Remote Print
With Epson Remote Print software on your Windows computer or laptop, you can print to an Epson
Email-enabled product anywhere in the world.
1. Set up your product for network printing as described in this manual. See the link below.
2. Visit epson.com/connect to learn more about Remote Print and how to download the software.
3. Download and install the Remote Print software.
40
4. Obtain the email address and optional access key of the Epson product you want to use for printing,
and enter this address during Remote Print setup.
5. Select the print command in your application and choose the Remote Print driver for your Epson
product.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
The Epson Scan to Cloud service sends your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with
Epson Connect.
1. Set up your product for network scanning as described in this manual. See the link below.
2. Visit epson.com/connect for instructions on registering an account and your product with Epson
Connect.
3. After registering, sign in to the Epson Connect web page with the email address and password you
selected.
4. Select Destination List for Scan to Cloud.
5. Click Add, then follow the instructions on the screen to create your destination list.
6. When you're ready to scan, select the setting for the Scan to Cloud service on your product control
panel.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using AirPrint
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print to your AirPrint-enabled product from your iOS device running the
latest version of iOS, and from your Mac running OS X 10.7 or later.
41
1. Set up your product for wireless printing as described in this manual. See the link below.
2. Connect your Apple device to the same wireless network that your product is using.
3. Print from your device to your product.
Note: For details, see the AirPrint page on the Apple website.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Google Cloud Print
With a Google Account, you can print from your Apple or Android device to your Epson product. You can
also print from Chromebooks and the Google Chrome browser without drivers or cables.
Set up your Epson product for network printing as described in this manual. See the link below.
Note: Make sure your Epson printer and computer are connected to the same network before starting
the Google Cloud Print setup.
1. Connect your device to the same network that your Epson product is using.
2. Print a network status sheet.
3. Locate your product's IP address on the network status sheet.
4. Enter the IP address into the address bar of a web browser.
5. Select the Google Cloud Print Services option.
Note: If you don't see the Google Cloud Print Services option, turn your product off and back on. If
the option still doesn't appear, select the Firmware Update option and follow the on-screen
instructions to update your product.
6. Click Register.
7. Select the checkbox to agree to the Usage Advisory and click Next.
8. Click OK to launch the sign-in page.
A separate browser window opens.
42
9. Enter your Google Account username and password and click Sign in, or, if you don't have an
account, click Sign up for a new Google Account and follow the on-screen instructions.
10. Click Finish printer registration to complete setup and print a test page.
Your product is now linked to your Google Account and can be accessed from any Chromebook,
computer, Apple or Android device with Internet access. Visit Epson Support for more information on
using Google Cloud Print, or the Google Cloud Print website for a list of supported apps.
Setting Up Google Cloud Print on a Chromebook
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Setting Up Google Cloud Print on a Chromebook
With a Google Account, you can print from a Chromebook without drivers or cables.
Set up your Epson product for network printing as described in this manual. See the link below.
Note: Make sure your Epson product is connected to your wireless network before starting the Google
Cloud Print setup.
1. Turn on your Chromebook and connect it to the same wireless network as your product.
Note: See your Chromebook's documentation for details on connecting to a network.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click Add to Cloud Print in the notification that appears in the corner of your Chromebook
screen.
Note: If you do not see a notification, check to see if a number appears in the status area at the
lower-right corner of the screen. Click this number to open the notifications menu, then click Add
to Cloud Print.
• Open a web browser and enter chrome://devices in the address bar. Skip to step 4.
3. Click Add Device.
4. Click the Register button that appears next to your product.
43
5. Click Register on the confirmation screen. Your product's LCD screen displays a confirmation
message.
6. Select OK or press the OK button on your product to confirm the Google Cloud Print connection and
print a test page.
Your product is now linked to your Google Account and can be accessed from any Chromebook,
iPhone, or Android phone with Internet access. For more information on using Google Cloud Print,
visit Epson Support.
Parent topic: Using Google Cloud Print
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
44
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
See these sections to use your product on a Wi-Fi or wired network.
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Changing or Updating Network Connections
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate with your computer using a wireless router or access point.
The wireless router or access point can be connected to your computer over a wireless or wired network.
1
Epson product
2
Wireless router or access point
45
3
Computer with a wireless interface
4
Computer
5
Internet
6
Ethernet cable (used only for wired connection to the wireless router or access point)
Selecting Wireless Network Settings From the Control Panel
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Selecting Wireless Network Settings From the Control Panel
You can select or change wireless network settings using your product control panel.
To install your product on a wireless network, follow the instructions on the Start Here sheet and install
the necessary software by downloading it from the Epson website. The installer program guides you
through network setup.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is
not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.
1. Press the
2. Press
home button, if necessary.
.
3. Select Wi-Fi Setup.
You see a screen like this:
46
4. Select Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.
Note: If you need to disable the wireless network to set up your product on an Ethernet network,
scroll down and select Disable Wi-Fi instead. Then follow the instructions on changing to a wired
network connection in this guide.
5. Select the name of your wireless network or enter the name manually.
Note: To enter the wireless network name manually, select Other Networks and select the
Network (SSID) field. Use the displayed keypad to enter your network name.
6. Select the Password field and enter your wireless password using the displayed keypad.
Note: The network name and password are case sensitive. Be sure to correctly enter uppercase and
lowercase letters, and numeric or special characters.
• Press
or
to move the cursor.
• Press
to change the case of letters.
• Press
to delete the previous character.
• Press
to enter numbers and symbols.
• Press
7. Press
to enter a space.
when you finish entering your password and select Proceed.
47
8. Confirm the displayed network settings and select OK to save them.
Note: If you need to change a setting, press the
back button.
9. If you want to print a network setup report, press one of the
10. Press the
buttons. (Otherwise, select Done.)
home button to exit.
Your product should now be connected to the network.
Note: If the WiFi connection symbol isn't lit or doesn't appear on the LCD screen, you may have
selected the wrong network name or entered the password incorrectly. Repeat these steps to try
again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Related references
Status Icon Information
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate directly with your computer or another device without
requiring a wireless router or access point.
1
Epson product
48
2
Computer with a wireless interface
3
Other wireless device
Your product automatically selects one of these modes to communicate with your computer or device:
Access point mode
If your product is not already connected to a wireless network, it enters access point mode and the
product itself acts as the network access point for up to 4 devices. When operating in this mode, your
product displays an AP connection symbol on the LCD screen.
Peer-to-peer mode
If your product is already connected to a wireless network, it enters peer-to-peer mode and
disconnects from any other networks. This also disables any other product features requiring access
to the Internet. When operating in this mode, your product displays a Direct or D connection symbol
on the LCD screen.
Note: To disconnect a peer-to-peer mode connection, release the connection to your product from
your computer or other device. Your product will reconnect to the previously used network.
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Related references
Status Icon Information
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct mode to allow direct communication between your product and computer or
other devices without a wireless router or access point.
1. Press the
2. Press
home button, if necessary.
.
3. Select Wi-Fi Setup.
49
You see a screen like this:
4. Scroll down and select Wi-Fi Direct Setup.
5. Select Connection Setup.
6. Select Change Password and select Yes.
Note: If you have already connected devices or computers to your product via Wi-Fi Direct, they are
disconnected when you change the password.
7. Enter your new Wi-Fi Direct password.
Note: Your password must be at least 8 and no more than 22 characters long.
• Press
• Press
or
to move the cursor.
to change the case of letters.
50
• Press
to delete the previous character.
• Press
to enter numbers and symbols.
• Press
8. Press
to enter a space.
when you finish entering your password.
You see a screen like this:
9. Scroll down to view the SSID (Wi-Fi network name) and password.
10. Use your computer or wireless device to select the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) displayed on the
LCD screen, then enter the password shown.
11. Press the
home button to exit.
You see either an AP or Direct connection symbol on the LCD screen and should be able to print
directly to your product from your computer or device.
Note: If the AP or Direct connection symbol is not displayed on the LCD screen, Wi-Fi Direct mode
is not enabled. Repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Related references
Status Icon Information
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
51
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
If your network uses a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can quickly connect your
product to the network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).
Note: To check if your router is WPS-enabled, look for a button labeled WPS on your router or access
point. If there is no hardware button, there may be a virtual WPS button in the software for the device.
Check your network product documentation for details.
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
If you have a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can use Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) to
connect your product to the network.
1. Press the
2. Press
home button, if necessary.
.
3. Select Wi-Fi Setup.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select Push Button Setup (WPS).
5. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete WPS setup.
6. Press the
home button to exit.
Your product should now be connected to the network.
52
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
You can print a network status sheet to help you determine the causes of any problems you may have
using your product on a network.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Network Status.
4. Select Wi-Fi/Network Status.
You see a screen like this:
Note: If you are connected to a wireless network, the signal strength is also displayed.
53
5. Select Print.
6. Press one of the
buttons to print the network status sheet.
Examine the settings shown on the network status sheet to diagnose any problems you have.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Changing or Updating Network Connections
See these sections to change or update how your product connects to a network.
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router
Configuring Email Server Settings
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Accessing the Web Config Utility
You can select your product's network settings and confirm its operating status using a web browser.
You do this by accessing your product's built-in Web Config utility from a computer or other device that is
connected to the same network as your product.
Note: For more information on the Web Config utility see the Administrator's Guide.
1. Print a network status sheet.
2. Locate the IP Address for your product that is listed on the network status sheet.
3. On a computer or other device connected to the same network as your product, open a web
browser.
4. Enter your product's IP address into the address bar.
You see the available Web Config utility options.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related tasks
Printing a Network Status Sheet
54
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection
If you have already connected your product to your computer using a USB connection, you can change
to a Wi-Fi connection or add a Wi-Fi connection to print wirelessly.
1. Do one of the following:
• If you want to use only a Wi-Fi connection, disconnect the USB cable from your product. With
Windows, also uninstall your product software.
• If you want to add a Wi-Fi connection in addition to a USB connection, leave the USB cable
connected to your product.
2. Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the
Start Here sheet.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection
If you have already connected your product to your computer wirelessly, you can change to a wired
network connection if necessary.
1. Disable your product's Wi-Fi features.
2. Connect one end of an Ethernet network cable to the product's LAN port.
3. Connect the other end to any available LAN port on your router or access point.
4. Uninstall your product software.
5. Download and install your product software from the Epson website.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
7. When you see the Select Your Connection screen, select Wired network connection.
8. If you see a Select Setup Option screen, select Setup printer for the first time.
9. Continue following the rest of the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related tasks
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router
If you change the wireless router you have been using on your network, you need to update your
product's Wi-Fi connection to the new router.
55
Note: If you switch to a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. See your router documentation for instructions.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Uninstall your product software.
• OS X: Go to the next step.
2. Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the
Start Here sheet.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related tasks
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Configuring Email Server Settings
To use features such as scanning to email or forwarding faxes to email, you need to configure the email
server. You can select settings for the email server using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
56
4. Select Wi-Fi/Network Settings.
5. Select Advanced Setup.
6. Select Email Server.
7. Select Server Settings.
You see a screen like this:
8. Select one of the options shown above, then select the settings you want to use. Contact your
internet service provider if necessary to confirm the authentication method for the email server.
9. Select OK to save and select Done to exit.
10. Select Connection Check to verify the connection to the email server.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related tasks
Scanning to Email
Forwarding Received Faxes
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
You may need to disable your product's Wi-Fi features if you change your network connection type or
need to solve a problem with your network connection.
Note: Before disabling Wi-Fi features, make a note of your product's SSID (network name) and
password, and any network settings selected for the Epson Connect services you may use.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
57
2. Press
.
3. Select Wi-Fi Setup.
You see this screen:
4. Scroll down and select Disable Wi-Fi.
5. Select Yes to disable Wi-Fi.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
58
Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript
Printing
Before enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript printing on your product, make sure
you have installed the software as described on the Start Here sheet.
To download the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript drivers, go to epson.com/support/wf8590.
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
You can select settings for PCL and PostScript printing using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select Universal Print Settings.
5. Select PDL Print Configuration.
59
You see a screen like this:
6. Select one of the options shown above, then select the settings you want to use.
7. When you are finished, press the
home button to exit.
PDL Print Configuration Options
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
PDL Print Configuration Options
Select the PDL Print Configuration options you want to use for PCL or PostScript printing.
PDL Print Configuration Available
option
settings
Description
Common Settings
Paper Size
Various sizes
Sets the default paper size for PCL or PostScript
printing.
Paper Type
Various paper
types
Sets the default paper type for PCL or PostScript
printing.
Orientation
Portrait
Sets the default orientation for PCL or PostScript
printing.
Landscape
Quality
Draft
Sets the quality for PCL or PostScript printing.
Standard
Best
60
PDL Print Configuration Available
option
settings
Description
Ink Save Mode
On/Off
Saves ink by reducing print density.
Print Order
Last Page on
Top
Starts printing from the first page of a file.
First Page on
Top
Starts printing from the last page of a file.
Number of Copies
1 to 999
Selects the number of copies to print.
Binding Margin
Left Edge
Specifies the binding edge for double-sided documents.
Top Edge
Auto Paper Ejection
On/Off
Ejects paper automatically when printing is stopped
during a print job.
2-Sided Printing
On/Off
Selects duplex printing.
Resident
Uses a font preinstalled on the printer.
Download
Uses a font you have downloaded.
Font Number
1 to 111
Selects the default font number for the default font
source.
Pitch
0.44 to 99.99 cpi
Selects the default font pitch if the font is scalable and
fixed-pitch (availability depends on font source and
number settings).
Height
4.00 to 999.75 pt
Selects the default font height if the font is scalable and
proportional (availability depends on font source and
number settings).
Symbol Set
Various
Selects the default symbol set. If the selected font is not
available for the selected symbol set, the font source
and number are replaced with IBM-US (the default
setting).
PCL Menu
Font Source
61
PDL Print Configuration Available
option
settings
Description
Form
5 to 128 lines
Sets the number of lines for the selected paper size and
orientation. Changes the line spacing (VMI) stored in
the printer. Later changes in page size or orientation
cause changes in the Form value based on the stored
VMI.
CR Function
CR
Selects the line feed command when printing with a
driver from a specific operating system.
CR+LF
LF Function
LF
CR+LF
Paper Source Assign
4
Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 4
4K
Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 4000, 5000, and 8000
5S
Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 5S
Error Sheet
On/Off
Prints a sheet showing the status when errors occur
during PostScript or PDF printing.
Coloration
Color
Selects the color mode for PostScript printing.
PS3 Menu
Mono
Image Protect
On/Off
Disable to lower the print quality automatically if the
printer's memory becomes full.
Binary
On/Off
Enable when printing files that contain binary images
(available when the product is connected to the
network). Allows you to print binary images even if the
driver is set to ASCII.
Text Detection
On/Off
Converts a text file to a PostScript file when printing
(available when Printing Language is set to PS3).
62
PDL Print Configuration Available
option
settings
Description
PDF Page Size
Selects the paper size when printing a PDF file. If Auto
is selected, the paper size is determined based on the
size of the first page.
Various sizes
Parent topic: Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
You can select printer language and interface settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select Printer Settings.
63
You see a screen like this:
5. Select the Printing Language and other settings you want to use.
6. When you are finished, press the
home button to return to the Home screen.
Printer Language and Interface Options
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Printer Language and Interface Options
Select the settings you want to use.
Printer Settings option
Available
settings
Description
USB I/F Timeout Setting 0.5 to 300
seconds
Specify the length of time before ending USB
communication from a computer using the PCL or
PostScript driver. This setting is necessary to avoid
endless USB communication.
Printing Language
Select the language for the USB or network interface.
Auto
PCL
PS3
PDF
PC Connection via USB Enable
Select whether to allow USB communication with the
product.
Disable
64
Parent topic: Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet
You can print a PS3 (PostScript) status sheet to confirm the current font information and PostScript
printing software version.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Print Status Sheet.
4. Select PS3 Status Sheet.
5. Press one of the
buttons to print the status sheet.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
65
Loading Paper
Before you print, load paper for the type of printing you will do.
Note: Load only plain paper when printing with the PostScript (PS3) printer software.
Loading Paper in the Cassette
Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot
Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot
Paper Loading Capacity
Available Epson Papers
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes
Loading Paper in the Cassette
You can load paper up to this size in the paper cassette: A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
Note: If the optional paper cassette units are installed, do not remove more than one cassette at a time.
66
1. Make sure the product is not operating and pull out the paper cassette.
2. Slide the front edge guide outward all the way, then slide the side edge guides to the paper size you
are using.
67
3. Load paper with the printable side facedown and slide the front edge guide against the paper.
Note: Make sure the paper fits beneath the arrow mark inside the edge guides.
4. Make sure the paper size label matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper cassette. If
necessary, remove the label holder and change the paper size indicated on the label.
5. Insert the paper cassette all the way into the product.
68
6. Extend the output tray.
7. Select the size and type of paper you loaded on the product LCD screen.
Always follow these paper loading guidelines:
• Load only the recommended number of sheets.
• Load paper short edge first, no matter which way your document faces.
• Load the printable side facedown.
• Load letterhead or pre-printed paper top edge first.
• Do not load paper above the arrow mark inside the edge guides.
• Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions.
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Related references
Paper Loading Capacity
Related tasks
Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot
Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot
Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot
You can print envelopes or documents in a variety of paper types and sizes in the rear paper feed slot.
69
1. Open the feeder guard and pull up the paper support.
2. Slide the edge guides outward.
70
3. If you are inserting a stack of paper, fan the sheets and tap the stack on a flat surface to even the
edges.
Note: You can load one sheet of binder paper with holes on one of the long edges as shown. Do not
select automatic 2-sided printing for this type of paper.
4. Do one of the following:
• Insert paper, glossy or printable side up and short edge first, in the center of the slot.
Caution: To prevent paper feeding problems, make sure you do not load paper above the arrow
marks inside the edge guides.
71
• Load envelopes short edge first, with the flap facing down and the flap edge to the left, in the
center of the slot.
5. Slide the edge guides against the paper, but not too tightly.
6. Extend the output tray.
7. Select the size and type of paper you loaded in the Paper Setup menu.
72
Always follow these paper loading guidelines:
• Load only the recommended number of sheets.
• Load paper short edge first, no matter which way your document faces.
• Load the printable side faceup.
• Load letterhead or pre-printed paper top edge first.
• Do not load paper above the arrow mark inside the edge guides.
• If you have trouble loading a stack of envelopes, press each envelope flat before loading it or load one
envelope at a time.
• If print quality declines when printing multiple envelopes, try loading one envelope at a time.
• Do not load envelopes that are curled, folded, or too thin.
• Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions.
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Related references
Paper Loading Capacity
Related tasks
Loading Paper in the Cassette
Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot
Loading Paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot
You can load one sheet of paper in the front paper feed slot.
Note: You cannot load paper while printing from the front paper feed slot. Paper that is too stiff may not
load correctly even if it is within the product's paper thickness specifications.
73
1. Extend the output tray.
2. Slide the edge guides to the paper size you are using.
3. Insert the paper with the printable side facedown until the product pulls it in partially.
Note: Keep the paper straight to prevent it from loading at an angle.
74
Always follow these paper loading guidelines:
• Load only one sheet at a time.
• Load paper short edge first, no matter which way your document faces.
• Load the printable side facedown.
• Load letterhead or pre-printed paper top edge first.
• Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions.
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Related references
Paper Specifications
Paper Loading Capacity
Related tasks
Loading Paper in the Cassette
Loading Paper and Envelopes in the Rear Paper Feed Slot
Paper Loading Capacity
Paper type
Loading capacity
Plain paper1
Paper cassettes
Rear paper feed slot
Front paper
feed slot
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
50 sheets
1
80 sheets
1
50 sheets
1
Up to the arrow mark
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]), A4
(8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]) , and
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches
[216 × 356 mm])
Up to the arrow mark
Epson Bright White Paper
1
200 sheets (cassette 1)
400 sheets (cassettes 2
to 4)
75
Paper type
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Loading capacity
Paper cassettes
Rear paper feed slot
Front paper
feed slot
—
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm]) and
larger
—
50 sheets
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]) and
smaller
70 sheets
Epson Photo Paper Glossy
—
20
—
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm]) and
larger
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Semi-gloss
Epson Ultra Premium Photo
Paper Glossy
10 sheets
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]) and
smaller
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte Double-sided
20 sheets
—
Epson Brochure & Flyer Paper
Matte Double-sided
Thick paper (cardstock up to 68 lb —
[256 g/m2])2
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
—
[297 × 420 mm]), Letter
(8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]) and A4
(8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm])
10 sheets
Envelopes
—
10 envelopes
76
—
1
You can print 2-sided print jobs automatically or manually. You can only print 2-sided print jobs
manually in the rear paper feed slot. Load up to 30 sheets for manual 2-sided print jobs.
2
You can load up to 5 sheets for manual 2-sided print jobs.
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Available Epson Papers
You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at Epson Supplies Central at epson.com/ink3 (U.S.
sales) or epson.ca (Canadian sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller.
To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766).
Paper Type
Size
Part number
Sheet count
Epson Bright White Paper
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041586
500
Epson Brochure & Flyer Paper
Matte Double-sided
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042384
150
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041062
100
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches
[216 × 356 mm])
S041067
100
11 × 17 inches
(279 × 432 mm)
S041069
100
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041070
100
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
S041467
50
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041257
50
S042180
100
11 × 14 inches
(279 × 356 mm)
S041468
50
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041260
50
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041263
50
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
77
Paper Type
Size
Part number
Sheet count
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte Double-sided
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041568
50
Epson Photo Paper Glossy
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
S041809
50
S042038
100
S041141
20
S041649
50
S041271
100
11 × 17 inches
(279 × 432 mm)
S041156
20
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041143
20
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
S041808
40
S041727
100
16:9 wide (4 × 7.1 inches
[102 × 181 mm])
S042109
20
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm)
S041464
20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
S041465
20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042183
25
S041667
50
11 × 14 inches
(279 × 356 mm)
S041466
20
11 × 17 inches
(279 × 432 mm)
S041290
20
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041288
20
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041289
20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Glossy
78
Paper Type
Size
Part number
Sheet count
S042181
60
S042174
100
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm)
S041945
20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
S041946
20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042182
25
S042175
50
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
S041982
40
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041331
20
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041327
20
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Semi-gloss
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
For this paper
Select this paper Type or Media Type setting
Plain paper
Plain Paper / Bright White Paper
Epson Bright White Paper
Letterhead paper
Letterhead
Recycled paper
Recycled
Color paper
Color
Preprinted paper
Preprinted
Envelopes
Envelope
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Photo Paper Glossy
Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss
Premium Photo Paper Semi-Gloss
79
For this paper
Select this paper Type or Media Type setting
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Doublesided
Epson Brochure & Flyer Paper Matte Double-sided
Cardstock up to 68 lb (256 g/m2)
Card Stock
Note: The settings listed here are available only when printing from your computer; they do not apply to
your product's control panel settings.
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
You can change the default paper size and paper type for each source using the control panel on the
product.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Paper Setup.
4. Select the paper source you want to change.
80
You see a screen like this:
5. Select Paper Size.
6. Select the paper size you loaded.
7. Select Paper Type.
8. Select the paper type you loaded.
9. Select OK.
10. Select another paper source to change or press
home to return to exit.
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Select a Paper Type setting that matches the paper you loaded.
Paper type loaded
Paper Type setting
Plain paper
Plain Paper
Epson Bright White Paper
Letterhead paper
Letterhead
Recycled paper
Recycled
Color paper
Color
Preprinted paper
Preprinted
81
Paper type loaded
Paper Type setting
Envelopes
Envelope
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Ultra Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Prem. Glossy
Epson Photo Paper Glossy
Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss
Prem. Semi-Gloss
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Prem. Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Doublesided
Epson Brochure & Flyer Paper Matte Double-sided
Cardstock up to 68 lb (256 g/m2)
Card Stock
Parent topic: Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
You can adjust default paper settings as an administrator that apply to all print jobs sent to the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
Selecting the Default Printer Settings
Setting the Universal Print Settings
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Selecting the Default Printer Settings
You can change default printer settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
82
2. Select Setup.
You see a screen like this:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select Printer Settings.
5. Select the Paper Source Settings options you want to use.
6. Select one of these Auto Error Resolver options:
• Turn on this setting to display a warning and print single-sided when a 2-sided printing error
occurs, or to print only what the printer could process when a memory full error occurs.
• Turn off this setting to display an error message and stop printing if an error occurs.
7. When you are finished, press the
home button to exit.
Paper Source Settings Options
83
Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Paper Source Settings Options
Select the paper source options you want to use for your printed jobs.
Paper Source
Settings option
Available settings
Description
Rear Paper Feed Normal
Priority
Last
Select Normal to give printing priority to paper loaded in the
rear paper feed slot.
A4/Letter Auto
Switching
Select On to switch the selected paper size to match the
loaded paper (Letter or A4) if the wrong size is selected.
On
Off
Auto Select
Settings
Copy
Fax
Select On for any of these settings to automatically print on
paper from any source containing paper that matches your
paper settings.
Other
Error Notice
Paper Size Notice
Paper Type Notice
Select On for either of these settings to display an error
message when the selected paper type or size does not
match the loaded paper.
Parent topic: Selecting the Default Printer Settings
Setting the Universal Print Settings
You can change the default universal print settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
84
You see this screen:
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
You see this screen:
4. Select Universal Print Settings.
5. Adjust the settings as necessary.
6. When you are finished, press the
home button to exit.
Universal Print Settings Options
Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Universal Print Settings Options
Select the universal print setting options you want to use for your printed jobs.
85
Universal Print
Settings option
Available settings
Description
Top Offset
—
Adjust the top or left margin.
Left Offset
—
Top Offset in
Back
—
Left Offset in
Back
—
Check Paper
Width
On
Dry Time
Off
Standard
Long
Adjust the top or left margin of the back page when
performing double-sided printing.
Select On to check the paper width before printing. This
prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper when the
paper size settings are incorrect, but may reduce the
printing speed.
Select the ink drying time you want to use when performing
double-sided printing.
Longer
Skip Blank Page
On
Select On to skip printing of blank pages automatically.
Off
PDL
Configuration
Common Settings
PCL Menu
Selects the settings for printing with PCL and PostScript
Page Description Language drivers.
PS3 Menu
Parent topic: Setting the Universal Print Settings
Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes
Follow these instructions to add the optional cabinet and paper cassette to your product. If you are
installing the optional cabinet, install the cabinet under the bottom of the optional cassette unit first.
Installing the Optional Cabinet
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Parent topic: Loading Paper
86
Installing the Optional Cabinet
You can install the optional cabinet to provide mobility and extra storage space.
1. Turn off the product, and unplug the power cord and any connected cables.
Warning: To avoid electric shock, make sure you unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the cabinet from its packaging and remove any protective materials.
3. Make sure you have all the items shown here:
87
4. Place the cabinet on a flat surface and lock the front casters.
5. Attach and secure the stands to the cabinet with the included screws.
Caution: Make sure the stands are securely attached or the product may fall over.
88
6. Remove the output tray and paper cassette from the product.
Note: If you installed the optional paper cassette unit, remove the paper cassette from the optional
cassette unit instead.
89
7. Lift up your product and gently lower it onto the cabinet with the corners aligned. Secure the product
to the cabinet with the included screws.
90
Warning: To lift the product, have two or more people hold it as shown here. Lifting from other areas
may cause the product to fall or cause you to pinch your fingers when placing the product down.
91
Note: Secure the optional cassette to the cabinet as shown here.
92
8. Secure the back of the product or paper cassette unit to the cabinet using the included brackets and
screws.
9. Insert the paper cassette you removed and attach the output tray.
10. Connect the power cord and other connection cables, then plug in the product.
93
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
You can install up to three optional paper cassette units to provide more paper capacity. If you are using
the optional cabinet, install the cabinet under the bottom of the cassette unit first.
1. Turn off the product, and unplug the power cord and any connected cables.
Warning: To avoid electric shock, make sure you unplug the power cord.
2. Uninstall any optional cassette units already installed on the product.
Note: To uninstall any optional cassette units, turn off the product, unplug the power cord,
disconnect any cables, and follow the rest of these instructions in reverse.
3. Remove the paper cassette unit from its packaging and remove any protective materials.
4. Make sure you have all the items shown here:
94
5. Remove the output tray and paper cassette from the product.
6. Remove the paper cassette from the optional paper cassette unit.
95
7. Stack all optional paper cassette units on top of each other and secure them to each other with the
included screws.
96
8. Lift up your product and gently lower it onto the paper cassette unit with the corners aligned. Secure
the product to the paper cassette unit with the included screws using a screw driver.
97
Warning: To lift the product, have two people hold it as shown here. Lifting from other areas may
cause the product to fall or cause you to pinch your fingers when placing the product down.
98
9. Secure the back of the paper cassette units to each other and to the product using the included
brackets and screws.
10. Insert a label into the holder indicating the paper size to be loaded in the paper cassette.
99
11. Place the correct sticker on the cassette unit to indicate the cassette number.
12. Connect the power cord and other connection cables, then plug in the product.
13. Turn on the product.
14. Pull out and reinsert the paper cassette in the optional paper cassette unit to confirm the cassette
unit is displayed on the Paper Setup screen.
15. Enable the optional paper cassette units in the printer software.
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - OS X
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Cabinet and Paper Cassettes
Related tasks
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
100
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - OS X
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software.
Note: If you are using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software, see the
sections covering that software in this manual to enable the optional cassette units.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click
Printer properties.
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your printer name and select
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click your printer name and select Properties.
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click your product name and
select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
101
You see a window like this:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected, then click Get.
The optional paper sources are listed in the Current Printer Information section.
4. Click OK.
The optional paper cassettes are now enabled.
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Related tasks
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - OS X
You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software.
102
Note: If you are using the PostScript (PS3) printer software, see the section covering that software in
this manual to enable the optional cassette units.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences.
2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Driver or Options.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select the number of optional cassette units installed for the Lower Cassette setting.
5. Click OK.
The optional paper cassettes are now enabled.
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Related tasks
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
103
Placing Originals on the Product
Follow the instructions here to place your original documents or photos on the product.
Caution: Do not place anything on top of your product or use its cover as a writing surface to avoid
damaging it.
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
You can place originals up to this size on the scanner glass: A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm]).
1. Open the document cover.
2. Place your original facedown on the scanner glass with the top facing into the corner. Slide the
original to the edges of the indicated corner.
Note: You can place multiple originals on the scanner glass. Just make sure they are at least
0.8 inch (20 mm) away from each other.
3. Close the document cover gently to keep your original in place.
Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product
104
Related topics
Copying
Scanning
Faxing
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
You can place multi-page original documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).You can also
use the ADF to scan both sides of a 2-sided document. Make sure the originals meet the Automatic
Document Feeder specifications before loading them.
Caution: Make sure your originals are not creased or folded, and do not contain holes, staples, tape, or
other materials that could obstruct the feeder.
1. Slide the ADF edge guide outward.
105
2. Fan your stack of originals and tap them gently on a flat surface to even the edges.
3. Insert the originals into the ADF faceup and top-edge first.
The ADF icon on the control panel lights up.
106
4. Slide the ADF edge guide against the originals, but not too tightly.
Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product
Related references
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Related topics
Copying
Scanning
Faxing
107
Copying
See the information here to copy documents or photos using your product.
Note: Copies may not be exactly the same size as your originals.
Copying Documents or Photos
Copying Options
Copying Documents or Photos
You can copy documents or photos onto various sizes and types of paper, including Epson special
papers.
1. Place your original document or photo on the scanner glass, or place multi-page documents in the
ADF.
2. Load the paper you want to print on.
3. Press the
home button, if necessary.
4. Select Copy.
You see a screen like this:
5. To print more than one copy, press a number key on the product's control panel, or select copies
and use the displayed keypad to enter the number of copies.
6. Change any of the displayed settings as necessary.
108
7. Select Settings to view and change additional copy settings, if necessary. Then press the
button
back
8. Select Preview to preview your copy on the LCD screen.
9. Select Preset to save your copy settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact
your administrator for assistance.
10. When you are ready to copy, press one of the
Note: To cancel printing, press the
buttons.
Stop button or select Cancel.
Parent topic: Copying
Related references
Available Epson Papers
Copying Options
Related tasks
Using Presets
Related topics
Loading Paper
Placing Originals on the Product
Copying Options
Select the copying options you want to use for your copies.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on other copying settings.
109
Copying option
Available settings
Description
Layout
With Border
Leaves a small margin around the image or document
2-up Copy
Copies multiple page documents onto one sheet. Also,
select Settings and change the Document Orientation and
Layout Order settings as necessary.
4-up
ID Card
Copies both sides of an ID card onto one side of a sheet of
paper
Split Pages
Copies two facing pages of a book onto separate sheets of
paper.
Document Size
Various sizes
Select the document size of your original
Paper Source
Various sources
Select the paper source that you want to use. If you select
Auto, paper is fed automatically depending on the paper
settings you selected for the paper sources.
Zoom
Custom Size
Automatically sizes the image by the percentage you select
Actual Size
Copies at 100% size
Auto Fit Page
Automatically sizes the image to fit the paper size you
selected
Letter->4x6in and
other conversions
Automatically converts from one size to another
Off
Select to make 2-sided copies. When you select 1>2-Sided
or 2>1-Sided, also select Advanced and select the binding
edge for your originals or copies.
2-Sided
2>2-Sided
1>2-Sided
2>1-Sided
Document
Orientation
Quality
Portrait
Specifies the orientation of your originals
Landscape
Text
Text(Best)
Specifies the document type of your originals and adjusts
the quality of your copies
Text & Image
Text & Image(Best)
Photo
110
Copying option
Available settings
Description
Density
Varying levels
Adjusts the lightness or darkness of copies
Remove Shadow Off
On
Remove Punch
Holes
Off
Collate Copy
Off
Select On to erase the shadows that appear in the center of
a document when copying a book or that appear around a
document when copying thick paper
Select On to erase the binding holes on a document
On
On
Mixed
Documents
On
Dry Time
Standard
Off
Long
Select On to print multiple copies of a multi-page document
both in order and sorted into sets
Select On to copy originals of varying sizes in their original
sizes.
Select to adjust the drying time for 2-sided copies, if
smudges or marks appear on the front of the paper when
you print on the second side
Longer
Advanced
Settings
Various settings
Select advanced settings such as Saturation and
Sharpness
Parent topic: Copying
111
Printing from a Computer
Before printing from your computer, make sure you have set up your product and installed its software
as described on the Start Here sheet.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website. If you see a Software Update screen, select Enable automatic checking
and click OK. The update scans your system to see if you have the latest product software. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Printing with Windows
Printing with OS X
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
Printing with Windows
You can print with your product using any Windows printing program, as described in these sections.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
112
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use.
Note: You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings.
You see the Main tab of your printer settings window:
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting.
113
6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
8. Select the Quality setting that matches the print quality you want to use.
9. Select a Color option:
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
• To print text and graphics in black or shades of gray, select the Black/Grayscale setting.
10. To print on both sides of the paper, select the 2-Sided Printing checkbox and select the options you
want.
11. To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, or print one image on multiple sheets of paper, select
one of the settings in the Multi-Page menu and select the printing options you want.
12. To print multiple copies and arrange their print order, select the Copies options.
13. To preview your job before printing, select Print Preview.
14. To save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with other print jobs, select
Job Arranger Lite.
15. To reduce noise during printing when you select Plain Paper/Bright White Paper, select On in the
Quiet Mode menu.
Paper Source Options - Windows
Print Quality Options - Windows
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
114
Paper Source Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Note: Paper Cassette 2 through Paper Cassette 4 are available only if you have installed the optional
cassettes.
Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size.
Paper Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 2
Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 3
Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 4
Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source.
Rear Paper Feed Slot
Selects the paper in the rear feed slot as the paper source.
Front Paper Feed Slot
Selects the paper in the front feed slot as the paper source.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Print Quality Options - Windows
You can select any of the available Quality options to fine-tune the quality of your print. Some settings
may be unavailable, depending on the paper type and border setting you have chosen.
Draft
For draft printing on plain paper.
Standard
For everyday text and image printing.
Standard - Vivid
For text and graphics with good quality and print speed.
High
For photos and graphics with high print quality.
115
More Settings
Opens a window that lets you choose among levels of speed and quality.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Multi-Page menu to set up your multi-page print job.
2-Up and 4-Up
Prints 2 or 4 pages on one sheet of paper. Click the Page Order button to select page layout and
border options.
2×1 Poster, 2×2 Poster, 3×3 Poster, 4×4 Poster
Prints one image on multiple sheets of paper to create a larger poster. Click the Settings button to
select image layout and guideline options.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting one of the 2-Sided Printing options on the Main
tab.
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen
or if you are accessing the product over a network.
1. Select one of the following options for 2-Sided Printing:
• Auto (Long-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper
on the long edge.
• Auto (Short-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper
on the short edge.
• Manual (Long-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by printing one side and
prompting you to flip the paper over on the long edge to print the other side (recommended for
paper types that do not support automatic duplexing).
116
• Manual (Short-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by printing one side and
prompting you to flip the paper over on the short edge to print the other side (recommended for
paper types that do not support automatic duplexing).
2. Click the Settings button.
You see this window:
117
3. Select the double-sided printing options you want to use.
4. Click OK to return to the Main tab.
5. Click the Print Density button.
You see this window:
6. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software
automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
7. If necessary, select the Adjustments options you want to use.
8. Click OK to return to the Main tab.
9. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings.
10. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing.
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows
Print Density Adjustments - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
118
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options on the 2-Sided Printing Settings window to set up your
double-sided print job.
Binding Edge Options
Select a setting that orients double-sided print binding in the desired direction.
Binding Margin Options
Select options that define a wider margin to allow for binding.
Start Page
Selects whether printing starts on the front or back page.
Create Folded Booklet Options
Select the Booklet checkbox and a binding option to print double-sided pages as a booklet.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Print Density Adjustments - Windows
You can select any of the available options on the Print Density Adjustment window to adjust the print
quality of your double-sided print job.
Print Density
Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing.
Increase Ink Drying Time
Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing
the other side in double-sided printing to prevent ink smearing.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
119
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
You can select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo on the More
Options tab.
1. To change the size of your printed document or photo, select the Reduce/Enlarge Document
checkbox and select one of these sizing options:
• Select the Fit to Page option to size your image to fit the paper you loaded. Select the size of the
your document or photo as the Document Size setting, and the size of your paper as the Output
Paper setting. If you want to center your image on the paper, select the Center option.
• Select the Zoom to option to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage.
Select the percentage in the % menu.
2. Select one of the following Color Correction options:
• Select Automatic to automatically adjust the sharpness, brightness, contrast, and color saturation
for your image.
120
• Select Custom and click the Advanced button to manually adjust the color correction settings or
turn off color management in your printer software.
• Select Image Options to access additional settings for improving printed images.
Note: You can also select Color Universal Print settings.
3. To add the following features, click the Watermark Features button:
• Anti-Copy Pattern: adds a watermark that only appears when your printout is copied.
• Watermark: adds a visible watermark to your printout.
Note: Click the Add/Delete button to create your own watermark, and click the Settings button to
customize the watermark.
• Header/Footer: adds information such as the date and time to the top or bottom of your printout.
Note: Click the Settings button to customize the text and location of the header or footer.
4. To add a password to your print job, select the Confidential Job checkbox, then enter a password.
Confidential jobs are stored in the product's memory without being printed. To print the job, enter the
password for the confidential job on the product's control panel.
Note: Confidential print jobs are cleared from the product's memory after printing.
5. Select any of the Additional Settings options to customize your print.
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Related tasks
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
121
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Color Correction window to customize the image colors
for your print job.
Color Controls
Lets you select a Color Mode setting, individual settings for Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and
Density, and individual color tones. Depending on the selected color mode, you can also adjust the
midtone density using the Gamma setting.
Fix Photo
Improves the color, contrast, and sharpness of flawed photos.
Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include
faces. For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo
includes a face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to
retain the special color effects.
122
ICM
Lets you manage color using installed color printing profiles.
No Color Adjustment
Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your
application software.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Image Options and Additional Settings to customize your print. Some options
may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Image Options
Emphasize Text
Adjusts the weight of printed text to increase readability.
Emphasize Thin Lines
Adjusts the weight of printed lines to increase visibility.
Edge Smoothing
Smooths jagged edges in low-resolution images such as screen captures or images from the Web.
Fix Red-Eye
Reduces or removes red-eye in photos.
Print Text in Black
Prints colored text in black.
For Color Text
Prints colored text on a background pattern or underlined.
For Color Graphs and Images
Prints colored graphics and images with overlay patterns.
For Color Text, Graphs, and Images
Prints colored text, graphics, and images with overlay patterns.
Enhancement Options
Specifies Color Universal Print enhancement settings for text, graphics, and images.
Additional Settings Options
Rotate 180º
Prints the image rotated 180º from its original orientation.
123
High Speed
Speeds up printing but may reduce print quality.
Mirror Image
Flips the printed image left to right.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Header/Footer Settings options to add headers or footers when you print. The
items are available to print at the top or bottom of your pages, in either the left, right, or center of the
page.
Note: These settings are not saved with your document.
You can select to print the following information:
• User Name
• Computer Name
• Date
• Date/Time
• Collate Number (copy number)
Note: The user name, computer name, date, and time come from the Windows Control Panel on your
computer.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
124
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows
For quick access to common groups of print settings, you can select a printing preset on the Main or
More Options tab.
Note: You can create your own preset by clicking the Add/Remove Presets button.
1. Click the Main or More Options tab.
You see the available Printing Presets on the left:
125
2. Place your cursor over one of the Printing Presets to view its list of settings.
3. Click on a preset to change its settings, or use any of the available options on the screen to control
your printing presets.
4. To choose a preset for printing, select it.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
You can select additional settings that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the product icon in the Windows taskbar.
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Maintenance tab.
You see the maintenance options:
126
4. Click the Extended Settings button.
You see this window:
5. Select any of the extended settings to customize your print.
6. Click OK to close the Extended Settings window.
7. Click OK to close the printer software window.
Extended Settings - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Extended Settings - Windows
You can select from these settings on the Extended Settings window.
Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3
Enables product monitoring for ink and paper supplies and other issues.
Check Paper Width Before Printing
Prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper if the paper size setting is incorrect; may reduce print
speed.
Thick Paper and Envelopes
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
127
Short Grain Paper
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper, and the Thick Paper
setting does not help.
Separator Page
Before each document, prints a separator page containing the title, user, date, and time.
Always Spool RAW Datatype
Increases print speed and may solve other printing problems.
Page Rendering Mode
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing.
Print as Bitmap
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing, and
other settings do not help.
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Change Standard Resolution
Reduces the resolution of print data to correct printing problems.
Refine screening pattern
Prints graphics with a finer screening pattern.
Allow Applications to Perform ICM Color Matching
Allows applications to perform ICM color matching.
Always Use the Driver's Paper Source Setting
Prints using the paper source setting in the printer driver, rather than the setting in your application.
Output 1 page documents facedown in 2-Sided mode
Outputs single-sided pages in a 2-sided print job facedown instead of faceup.
Parent topic: Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to save your settings and print.
1. Click OK to save your settings.
128
You see your application's Print window, such as this one:
2. Click OK or Print to start printing.
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Administrators can lock some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes. The following settings
can be locked:
• Anti-copy pattern
• Watermark
• Header/footer
• Color printing
• 2-sided printing
• Multi-page printing
129
• All document settings
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click
Printer properties.
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click your product and select Properties.
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click your product and select
Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
Note: You can prevent access to the Optional Settings tab by changing the user or group
permissions in the Security tab.
3. Click Driver Settings.
130
You see this window:
4. Select the checkbox for the function or functions you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All
Document Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting you want for each selected function.
6. Click OK.
Administrator Lock Settings
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Administrator Lock Settings
Select the settings you want to use for locking print functions.
131
Printing function Available settings
Description
Anti-Copy
Pattern
Various data items
Lets you select the data to use for the pattern (or prohibit
anti-copy patterns)
Add/Delete
Lets you add (or delete) a customized anti-copy pattern
Settings
Lets you select the arrangement, size, and other settings for
the custom anti-copy pattern
Various text
watermarks
Lets you select the text for the watermark (or prohibit
watermarks)
Add/Delete
Lets you add (or delete) a customized text or image-based
watermark
Watermark
Settings
Lets you select the size, position, color and other watermark
settings
Header/Footer
Color
2-sided printing
Multi-Page
Off
Prohibits headers or footers
On
Allows headers and footers
Settings
Lets you select the text and position for printing headers
and/or footers
Color
Allows color printing
Grayscale
Prints in black or shades of gray only
Off
Allows printing on one side of the paper only
On
Allows printing on both sides of the paper
Off
Prohibits multi-page settings
2-Up
Prints 2 pages on one sheet of paper
4-Up
Prints 4 pages on one sheet of paper
Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
If Access Control is enabled on the product, a user ID and password may be required to print. You can
enter the user ID and password in the printer driver.
Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
132
1. Click the Maintenance tab.
2. Click the Printer and Option Information button.
3. Select the Save Access Control Settings checkbox.
4. Click the Settings button.
5. Enter your user name and password.
6. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
133
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the product icon in the Windows taskbar.
2. Select Printer Settings.
You see the printer settings window:
3. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
4. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
You can change the language used on the Windows printer software screens.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the product icon in the Windows taskbar.
134
2. Select Printer Settings.
You see the printer settings window.
3. Click the Maintenance tab.
You see the maintenance options:
4. Select the language you want to use as the Language setting.
5. Click OK to close the printer software window.
The printer software screens appear in the language you selected the next time you access them.
Parent topic: Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options
Your printer software for Windows automatically checks for updates to the product software. You can
change how often the software checks for updates or disable this feature.
135
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the product icon in the Windows taskbar.
2. Select Software Update Settings.
You see this window:
3. Do one of the following:
• To change how often the software checks for updates, select a setting in the Check every menu.
• To disable the automatic update feature, select the Never option.
4. Click OK to exit.
Note: If you choose to disable the automatic update feature, you can check for updates manually.
Parent topic: Printing with Windows
Related tasks
Checking for Software Updates
Printing with OS X
You can print with your product using any OS X printing program, as described in these sections.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website.
136
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Selecting Page Setup Settings - OS X
Selecting Print Layout Options - OS X
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - OS X
Managing Color - OS X
Selecting Printing Preferences - OS X
Printing Your Document or Photo - OS X
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
137
You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the version of OS X and the application
you are using.
5. Select the Copies and Pages settings as necessary.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing.
138
6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image
above for the Preview application.
8. Select Print Settings from the pop-up menu.
139
You see these settings:
9. Select the Paper Source you wish to print from.
10. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Media Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
11. Select the Print Quality setting you want to use.
12. Select any of the available print options.
Paper Source Options - OS X
Print Quality Options - OS X
Print Options - OS X
Parent topic: Printing with OS X
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Selecting Page Setup Settings - OS X
140
Printing Your Document or Photo - OS X
Paper Source Options - OS X
You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size.
Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source.
Cassette 2
Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 3
Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 4
Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source.
Rear Paper Feed Slot
Selects the paper in the rear feed slot as the paper source.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Print Quality Options - OS X
You can select any of the available Print Quality options to fine-tune the quality of your print. Some
settings may be unavailable, depending on the paper type setting you have chosen.
Draft
For draft printing on plain paper.
Normal
For everyday text and image printing.
Normal - Vivid
For everyday text and image printing with good quality and print speed.
Fine
For text and graphics with good quality and print speed.
Quality
For text and graphics with increased quality and print speed.
Best Quality
For the best print quality, but the slowest print speed.
141
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Print Options - OS X
You can select any of the print options to customize your print. Some options may be unavailable,
depending on other settings you have chosen.
Grayscale
Prints text and graphics in black or shades of gray.
Mirror Image
Lets you flip the printed image horizontally.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Selecting Page Setup Settings - OS X
Depending on your application, you may be able to select the paper size and orientation settings from
the print window.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
1. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting.
2. Select the orientation of your document or photo as shown in the print window.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select the
icon.
Note: You can reduce or enlarge the size of the printed image by selecting Paper Handling from the
pop-up menu and selecting a scaling option.
Parent topic: Printing with OS X
142
Selecting Print Layout Options - OS X
You can select a variety of layout options for your document or photo by selecting Layout from the popup menu on the print window.
• To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet
pop-up menu. To arrange the print order of the pages, select a Layout Direction setting.
• To print borders around each page on the sheet, select a line setting from the Border pop-up menu.
• To invert or flip the printed image, select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings.
Parent topic: Printing with OS X
143
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - OS X
You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting Two-sided Printing Settings from the pop-up
menu on the print window.
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen
or if you are accessing the product over a network. This screen may be different, depending on the
version of OS X you are using.
1. Select one of the Two-sided Printing options.
144
2. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software
automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
3. If necessary, customize the Adjustments settings as instructed on the screen.
4. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings.
5. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing.
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - OS X
Parent topic: Printing with OS X
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - OS X
You can select any of the available options in the Two-sided Printing Settings or Output Settings
pop-up menu to set up your double-sided print job.
145
Two-sided Printing Options
Long-Edge binding
Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the long edge of the paper.
Short-Edge binding
Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the short edge of the paper.
Adjustments
Print Density
Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing.
Increased Ink Drying Time
Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing
the other side in double-sided printing.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - OS X
Managing Color - OS X
You can adjust the Color Matching and Color Options settings to fine-tune the colors in your printout, or
turn off color management in your printer software.
1. Select Color Matching from the pop-up menu in the print window.
2. Select one of the available options.
146
3. Select Color Options from the pop-up menu in the print window.
Note: The available settings on the Color Options menu depend on the option you selected on the
Color Matching menu.
4. Select one of the available options.
Color Matching and Color Options - OS X
Parent topic: Printing with OS X
Color Matching and Color Options - OS X
You can select from these settings on the Color Matching and Color Options menus.
Color Matching Settings
EPSON Color Controls
Lets you manage color using controls in your printer software or turn off color management.
ColorSync
Prints using standard color profiles for your product and paper to help match image colors. You can
customize the conversion method and filter settings on the ColorSync pop-up menu in the print
window.
147
Color Options Settings
Manual Settings
Lets you select manual color adjustments. Click the arrow next to Advanced Settings and select
settings for Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and individual color tones. You can also select a color
Mode setting for printing photos and graphics and the Fix Red-Eye setting to reduce or remove redeye in photos. Depending on the selected color mode, you can also adjust the midtone density using
the Gamma setting.
Fix Photo
Improves the color, contrast, and sharpness of flawed photos. Click the arrow next to Advanced
Settings and select the Fix Red-Eye setting to reduce or remove red-eye in photos.
Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include
faces. For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo
includes a face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to
retain the special color effects.
Off (No Color Adjustment)
Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your
application software.
Parent topic: Managing Color - OS X
Selecting Printing Preferences - OS X
You can select printing preferences that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences.
2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Driver or Options.
148
You see a screen like this:
4. Select any of the available printing preferences.
5. Click OK.
Printing Preferences - OS X
Parent topic: Printing with OS X
Printing Preferences - OS X
You can select from these settings on the Options or Driver tab.
Thick Paper and Envelopes
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Quiet Mode
Lessens noise during printing but may decrease print speed.
Permit temporary black printing
Allows you to print using black ink when color ink is expended.
149
High Speed Printing
Speeds up printing but may reduce print quality.
Warning Notifications
Lets you choose whether or not to receive warning notifications from the printer software for various
operating conditions.
Establish bidirectional communication
Allows the product to communicate with the computer. Do not change the default setting unless you
experience issues when using a shared printing pool.
Parent topic: Selecting Printing Preferences - OS X
Printing Your Document or Photo - OS X
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to print.
Click Print at the bottom of the print window.
Checking Print Status - OS X
Parent topic: Printing with OS X
Checking Print Status - OS X
During printing, you can view the progress of your print job, control printing, and check ink status.
150
1. Click the printer icon when it appears in the Dock.
You see the print status window:
2. Select the following options as necessary:
OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7:
• To cancel printing, click the print job and click the Delete icon.
• To pause a print job, click the print job and click the Hold icon. To resume a print job, click the print
job marked "Hold" and click the Resume icon.
• To pause printing for all queued print jobs, click the Pause Printer icon.
• To check ink status, click the Supply Levels icon.
OS X 10.8/10.9:
• To cancel printing, click the
• To pause a print job, click the
button.
button next to the print job.
button next to the print job. To resume a print job, click the
• To pause printing for all queued print jobs, click the large Pause button.
• To check ink status, click the Settings icon, then click the Supply Levels tab.
Parent topic: Printing Your Document or Photo - OS X
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You can print with the Epson Universal Print Driver using any Windows printing program, as described in
these sections.
151
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Maintenance Options - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
The Epson Universal Print Driver supports multiple printer languages, such as PCL and ESC/P-R, and
can be installed on a Windows computer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software.
1. Download the EPSON Universal Print Driver from epson.com/support/wf8590.
2. Double-click the downloaded package.
152
3. Follow the on-screen instructions until you see the screen below.
4. Select Yes: Network connection and click OK.
Note: Select the Set Default of Printer Control Language to PCL6 checkbox if you want to set the
default printer language to PCL6. Leave this option deselected to set the printer language to ESC/PR. (You can change this setting later as needed.)
153
After the software finishes searching for products, you see a screen like this:
5. Do one of the following:
• If you are installing one product, make sure Add EPSON Universal Print Driver is selected, and
continue with the next step.
• If you are installing more than one product, select Add found printers, and go to step 9.
Note: You can customize and filter your product search results by clicking Display Settings.
154
6. Open the Select a port to connect a printer pop-up menu and select an existing printer port if
necessary. Otherwise, skip this option to have a new port created automatically.
7. Select the product you want to install from the Found Printers list.
Note: Deselect the Set as default printer checkbox if you do not want the product to be set as your
default printer.
8. Click OK, then skip the remaining steps.
9. Select each product you want to install and click Add to Printer Folder.
155
The selected products appear in the lower section of the screen.
10. Select the checkbox next to a product to make it your default printer if necessary.
11. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You may need to synchronize the printer driver with the product if the printer driver does not detect the
correct information or settings from the product.
Note: You must sync the printer driver before you can use any optional equipment installed on the
product, such as an optional cassette unit.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties.
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
156
You see this window:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get.
Note: Select the Only Optional Information checkbox if you only want to enable optional
equipment, such as an optional cassette unit.
The product's settings and other information appears in the Current Printer Information area.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Related tasks
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
157
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select EPSON Universal Print Driver as the printer you want to use.
Note: You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings.
You see the Main tab of your printer settings window:
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
158
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting.
Note: You can also select the User-Defined setting to create a custom paper size.
6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
8. Select the Quality setting that matches the print quality you want to use.
9. Select a Color option:
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
• To print text and graphics in black or shades of gray, select the Grayscale setting.
10. To print on both sides of the paper, select one of the 2-Sided Printing settings.
11. To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, or print one image on multiple sheets of paper, select
one of the settings in the Multi-Page menu and select the printing options you want.
12. To print multiple copies and arrange their print order, select the Copies options.
13. To preview your job before printing, select Print Preview.
14. To save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with other print jobs, select
Job Arranger Lite.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Paper Source Options - Windows
Print Quality Options - Windows
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
159
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Epson Universal Print Driver Windows
You can select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo on the More
Options tab.
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
1. To change the size of your printed document or photo, select the Reduce/Enlarge Document
checkbox and select one of these sizing options:
• Select the Fit to Page option to size your image to fit the paper you loaded. Select the size of the
your document or photo as the Document Size setting, and the size of your paper as the Output
Paper setting. If you want to center your image on the paper, select the Center option.
• Select the Zoom to option to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage.
Select the percentage in the % menu.
160
2. Select one of the following Color Correction options:
• Select Automatic to automatically adjust the sharpness, brightness, contrast, and color saturation
for your image.
• Select Custom and click the Advanced button to manually adjust the color correction settings or
turn off color management in your printer software.
• Select Image Options to access additional settings for improving printed images.
3. To add the following features, click the Watermark Features button:
• Watermark: adds a visible watermark to your printout.
Note: Click the Add/Delete button to create your own watermark, and click the Settings button to
customize the watermark.
• Header/Footer: adds information such as the date and time to the top or bottom of your printout.
Note: Click the Settings button to customize the text and location of the header or footer.
4. To add a password to your print job, select the Confidential Job checkbox, then enter a password.
Confidential jobs are stored in the product's memory without being printed. To print the job, enter the
password for the confidential job on the product's control panel.
Note: Confidential print jobs are cleared from the product's memory after printing.
5. Select any of the Additional Settings options to customize your print.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Related references
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
161
Selecting Maintenance Options - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You can select maintenance and other optional settings on the Maintenance tab.
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
• Nozzle Check lets you print a nozzle check pattern to check for clogged nozzles.
• Head Cleaning lets you clean the print head.
• Network printer search lets you search for and connect to a product on the network.
• Job Arranger Lite lets you save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with
other print jobs.
• Extended Settings lets you change a variety of print settings.
• Print Queue displays all the print jobs in queue. You can also cancel or restart print jobs.
162
• Printer and Option Information displays information on the printer settings and any optional
equipment installed.
• Language lets you change the language of the printer software screens.
Extended Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Extended Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You can select from these settings on the Extended Settings window.
Printer Control Language
Lets you select the printer control language.
Graphics Mode
Lets you select the mode by which to output PDL commands to the product.
TrueType Font
Lets you select how you want to print TrueType fonts.
Offset Settings
Lets you make fine-tune adjustments to the print position of data on your printout.
163
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Always Spool RAW Datatype
Increases print speed and may solve other printing problems.
Print as Bitmap
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing, and
other settings do not help.
Refine screening pattern
Prints graphics with a finer screening pattern.
Always Use the Driver's Paper Source Setting
Prints using the paper source setting in the printer driver, rather than the setting in your application.
Uses the collate settings specified in the application
Prints using the collate setting in your application.
Page Rendering Mode
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing.
Collate Using Printer Driver
Prints and collates multi-page documents using the printer driver. Deselect this checkbox to use the
product to collate your print jobs instead. (This setting is automatically enabled if there is not enough
memory on the product to collate your print job.)
Output 1 page documents facedown in 2-Sided mode
Outputs single-sided pages in a 2-sided print job facedown instead of faceup.
Parent topic: Selecting Maintenance Options - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Print Preferences.
• Windows 7: Click
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printing Preferences.
164
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver, and select Printing Preferences.
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printing Preferences.
You see the printer settings window:
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
2. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
3. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
165
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Administrators can lock some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes. The following settings
can be locked:
• Watermark
• Header/footer
• Color printing
• 2-sided printing
• Multi-page printing
• All document settings
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties.
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
166
You see this window:
Note: You can prevent access to the Optional Settings tab by changing the user or group
permissions in the Security tab.
3. Click Driver Settings.
167
You see this window:
4. Select the checkbox for the function or functions you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All
Document Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting you want for each selected function.
6. Click OK.
Epson Universal Print Driver Lock Settings
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Epson Universal Print Driver Lock Settings
Select the settings you want to use for locking print functions.
168
Printing function Available settings
Description
Watermark
Various text
watermarks
Lets you select the text for the watermark (or prohibit
watermarks)
Add/Delete
Lets you add (or delete) a customized text or image-based
watermark
Settings
Lets you select the size, position, color and other watermark
settings
Header/Footer
Color
2-sided printing
Multi-Page
Off
Prohibits headers or footers
On
Allows headers and footers
Settings
Lets you select the text and position for printing headers
and/or footers
Color
Allows color printing
Grayscale
Prints in black or shades of gray only
Off
Allows printing on only one side of the paper
On
Allows printing on both sides of the paper
Off
Prohibits multi-page settings
2-Up
Prints 2 pages on one sheet of paper
4-Up
Prints 4 pages on one sheet of paper
Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You can use the Epson Universal Print Driver to find and add network printers.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties.
169
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
You see this window:
3. Click Network printer search.
4. When you see the search results, select Add found printers.
170
You see a screen like this:
5. Select the printer or printers you want to add.
6. Click Add to Printer Folder.
The selected printer or printers appear in the lower section of the screen.
7. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
171
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Windows printing program, as
described in these sections.
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
If you did not install the standard Epson printer software, you need to install the PostScript (PS3) printer
software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software.
1. Download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript from
epson.com/support/wf8590.
2. Double-click the downloaded package.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Accept.
5. Click Install.
6. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
If you installed optional paper cassette units, you need to enable the optional cassette units before you
can use them with the PS3 printer software.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer properties.
172
• Windows 7: Click
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select
Printer Properties.
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click your product name, and select Properties.
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click your product name and
select Properties.
2. Click the Device Settings tab.
You see a window like this:
3. Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting.
4. Click OK.
173
The optional paper cassettes are now enabled.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Related tasks
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use, and then click the
Preferences button.
174
You see the Layout tab of your printer settings window:
4. Select the orientation of your document.
5. To print on both sides of the paper, select one of the Print on Both Sides settings.
6. To change the printing order of the pages, select one of the Page Order settings.
7. To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, adjust the Pages per Sheet setting.
8. To create a folded booklet out of your photo or document, select the Booklet option.
9. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
175
You see this window:
10. Select the Paper Source that matches where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
11. Select Plain as the Media setting.
12. Select one of the following as the Color setting:
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
• To print text and graphics in black only, select the Black & White setting.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Related references
Paper Source Options - Windows
176
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
You can select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo by clicking
the Advanced button.
1. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting.
2. Select the Print Quality option that matches the print quality you want to use.
3. Adjust the Scaling setting to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage.
4. To utilize the Windows Image Color Management system, set the ICM Method option to one of the
ICM Handling options and select the ICM Intent setting you want to use.
5. Adjust the Pages Per Sheet Layout setting to change the order of multiple pages on a single sheet
of paper when you have adjusted the Pages Per Sheet setting on the Layout tab.
6. Adjust the Booklet Binding Edge setting to change the orientation of your printed booklet.
177
7. Expand the PostScript Options heading to access the advanced PostScript printer software features.
8. Select any of the remaining Printer Features options to customize your printouts.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Print Preferences.
• Windows 7: Click
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select
Printing Preferences.
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
right-click your product name, and select Printing Preferences.
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click your product name and
select Printing Preferences.
178
You see the printer settings window:
2. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
3. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any OS X printing program, as described
in these sections.
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Selecting Page Setup Settings - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
179
Selecting Print Layout Options - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Sizing Printed Images - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Managing Color - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Printing Your Document or Photo - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
If you did not install the standard Epson printer software, you need to install the PostScript (PS3) printer
software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software.
1. Download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript from
epson.com/support/wf8590.
2. Double-click the downloaded package.
3. Double-click EPSON.
4. Click Continue on the next two screens.
5. Click Agree.
6. Click Install.
7. If necessary, enter the administrator password.
8. Click Start and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
If you installed optional paper cassette units, you need to enable the optional cassette units before you
can use them with the PS3 printer software.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences.
2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Driver or Options.
180
You see a screen like this:
4. Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting.
5. Click OK.
The optional paper cassettes are now enabled.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Related tasks
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - OS X
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
181
3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
182
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the version of OS X and the application
you are using.
5. Select the Two-Sided, Copies, and Pages settings as necessary.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing.
6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image
above for the Preview application.
8. Select Paper Feed from the pop-up menu.
183
You see these settings:
9. Select All Pages From or First Page From and select the paper source you want to print from.
10. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu.
184
You see these settings:
11. Select Plain as the MediaType setting.
Note: The PostScript printer software supports plain paper printing on these paper and envelope
sizes:
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
12. Select one of the following Print Quality options:
• For fast printing with reduced quality, select Fast.
• For printing text and graphics with good quality and print speed, select Fine.
• For the best printing with reduced speed, select Maximum.
13. Select Color from the Feature Sets pop-up menu.
185
You see these settings:
14. Select a Color Mode option:
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
• To print text and graphics in black only, select the Monochrome setting.
15. Select any of the available print options.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Related tasks
Selecting Page Setup Settings - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Selecting Print Layout Options - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Printing Your Document or Photo - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
186
Selecting Page Setup Settings - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Depending on your application, you may be able to select the paper size and orientation settings from
the print window.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
1. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting. You can also select a custom
setting to create a custom paper size.
2. Select the orientation of your document or photo as shown in the print window.
Note: You can reduce or enlarge the size of the printed image by selecting Paper Handling from the
pop-up menu and selecting a scaling option.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
187
Selecting Print Layout Options - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
You can select a variety of layout options for your document or photo by selecting Layout from the popup menu on the print window.
• To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet
pop-up menu. To arrange the print order of the pages, select a Layout Direction setting.
• To print borders around each page on the sheet, select a line setting from the Border pop-up menu.
• To print on both sides of the page, select one of the Two-Sided settings.
• To invert or flip the printed image, select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
188
Sizing Printed Images - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
You can adjust the size of the image as you print it by selecting Paper Handling from the pop-up menu
on the Print window.
• To print only selected pages in a multi-page document, select an option from the Pages to Print popup menu.
• To adjust the order in which pages are printed, select an option from the Page Order pop-up menu.
• To scale the image to fit on a specific paper size, select the Scale to fit paper size checkbox and
select a paper size from the Destination Paper Size pop-up menu.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Managing Color - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
You can adjust the Color Matching settings to fine-tune the colors in your printout.
1. Select Color Matching from the pop-up menu in the print window.
189
2. Do one of the following:
• To print using standard color profiles for your product and paper to help match image colors,
select ColorSync. Select one of the available Profile options to change the active color profile.
• To use the product's default color matching, select In printer.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Printing Your Document or Photo - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to print.
Click Print at the bottom of the print window.
Checking Print Status - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - OS X
Checking Print Status - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
During printing, you can view the progress of your print job, control printing, and check ink status.
1. Click the printer icon when it appears in the Dock.
190
You see the print status window:
2. Select the following options as necessary:
OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7:
• To cancel printing, click the print job and click the Delete icon.
• To pause a print job, click the print job and click the Hold icon. To resume a print job, click the print
job marked "Hold" and click the Resume icon.
• To pause printing for all queued print jobs, click the Pause Printer icon.
• To check ink status, click the Supply Levels icon.
OS X 10.8/10.9:
• To cancel printing, click the
button next to the print job.
• To pause a print job, click the
button.
button next to the print job. To resume a print job, click the
• To pause printing for all queued print jobs, click the large Pause button.
• To check ink status, click the Settings icon, then click the Supply Levels tab.
Parent topic: Printing Your Document or Photo - PostScript Printer Software - OS X
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
If you need to cancel printing, press the
Stop button on your product.
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
191
Scanning
You can scan original documents or photos and save them as digital files.
Starting a Scan
Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture
Scanning Special Projects
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning - Windows
Starting a Scan
After placing your original documents or photos on your product for scanning, start scanning using one of
these methods.
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Starting a Scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan Icon
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program
Parent topic: Scanning
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
You can scan an image to a memory device or to your computer using your product's control panel.
1. Make sure you installed the product software and connected the product to your computer or
network.
Note: Restart your computer after installing the product software to enable scanning from the control
panel. Also make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your firewall or security
software.
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided document, place it in the ADF and select the 2-Sided setting.
192
3. Press the
home button, if necessary.
4. Select Scan.
You see a screen like this:
5. Select one of the following Scan to options:
• Email lets you send scanned files through a pre-configured email server.
• Network Folder/FTP saves your scan file to a specified folder on a network.
• Memory Device saves your scan file on a memory or USB device and lets you select the file
format, quality, and other settings.
• Cloud sends your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with Epson Connect.
• Document Capture Pro allows you to scan over a network using your saved job settings in
Document Capture Pro or Document Capture.
Note: You cannot use this option to scan an image to Document Capture or Document Capture
Pro when your product is connected to your computer's USB port.
• Computer (WSD) lets you manage network scanning in Windows 8.x, Windows 7, or Windows
Vista (English only). To use this feature, you must first set up WSD (Web Services for Devices) on
the computer.
6. Select Preset to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
193
7. Do any of the following, as necessary:
• Select the email address, location, destination, or computer, as necessary.
• Select Contacts to choose an email address or network folder.
• Select Format to choose the file format.
• Select Settings to display additional scanning options.
Scanning to Email
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Control Panel Scanning Options
Creating Contacts for Scanning
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Related tasks
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
Using Presets
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Scanning to Email
You can scan an image and email the scanned file using your product's control panel. You need to have
a preconfigured email server before you can scan to email. You can either enter the email address
directly on the product's control panel or select an address from the Contacts list. Make sure the date
and time are set correctly so the time stamps on your emails are accurate.
Note: You can also use the Scan to Document Capture Pro function to scan and email the scanned file.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided document, place it in the ADF and select the 2-Sided setting.
2. Press the
home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
194
You see a screen like this:
4. Select Email.
You see a screen like this:
5. Do one of the following:
• Select Contacts and choose an email address.
• Select Enter Email Address, then select Enter Email Address again to display the keyboard.
Use the keyboard to enter the address for the recipient, and press
.
6. Select Format to choose the file format for your scan.
7. Select Menu and select Email Settings. Change the Subject and Filename Prefix if necessary,
then press the back button to return to the Email screen.
195
8. Select Preset to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
9. Press one of the
buttons.
Your product scans your original and emails the scanned file.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Configuring Email Server Settings
Selecting the Date and Time
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
You can scan an image and save it to a network folder using your product's control panel. You can either
enter the folder path directly on the product's control panel or select a folder from the Contacts list.
Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided document, place it in the ADF and select the 2-Sided setting.
2. Press the
home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
196
You see a screen like this:
4. Select Network Folder/FTP.
You see a screen like this:
5. Do one of the following:
• Select Contacts and choose a saved location.
• Select Enter Location, then select the Communication Mode, Location, and other settings.
Note: Enter the folder path name for the Location setting in one of the following formats
depending on the Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
6. Select Format to choose the file format for your scan.
197
7. Select Menu and select File Settings. Change the Filename Prefix if necessary, then press the
back button to return to the Folder/FTP screen.
8. Select Preset to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
9. Press one of the
buttons.
Your product scans your original and saves it in the selected location.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related references
Control Panel Scanning Options
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Selecting the Date and Time
Creating Contacts for Scanning
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Control Panel Scanning Options
Select the options you want to use for scanning.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the Scan to option selected.
Scan to setting
Available options
Description
Subject
—
Lets you enter a subject for your email
Filename Prefix
—
Lets you enter a filename prefix for your scanned
file
198
Scan to setting
Available options
Description
Location
Communication
Mode
Lets you select Network Folder (SMB) or FTP
Location
Lets you enter a folder path in which to save
scanned images
User Name
Lets you enter a user name for the selected
folder path
Password
Lets you enter a password for the selected folder
path
Connection Mode
Lets you select the connection mode
Port Number
Lets you enter a port number
JPEG
Select for photos
PDF
Select for documents
TIFF (Single Page)
Select for scanned files that you can print from a
device. Multi Page TIFF documents are scanned
in black and white.
Format
TIFF (Multi Page)
Resolution
Scan Area
200dpi
Select for documents
300dpi
Select for photos
600dpi
Select for highest quality printing
Letter
Select the page size for documents
A4
Legal
Half Letter
Executive
2-Sided
Auto Cropping
Select for photos with dark edges
Max Area
Select for most photos
Off
Lets you scan 2-sided originals placed in the
ADF. If you select On, you can also select the
Binding Direction.
On
199
Scan to setting
Available options
Description
Document Type
Text
Specifies the type of original you are scanning
Text & Image
Photo
Density
–4 to +4
Adjusts the lightness or darkness of scanned
images.
Document Orientation
Portrait
Specifies the orientation of PDF documents
Landscape
Compression Ratio
High
Select High for smaller file size or Low for best
quality
Middle
Low
PDF Settings
Attached File Max Size
Document Open
Password
Lets you set a password for opening the
document
Permissions
Password
Lets you set a password for printing or editing
the document
Various sizes
Lets you select the maximum file size that can
be attached to an email
Note: When you turn on password settings, you can use the LCD screen keyboard to set the password.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Creating Contacts for Scanning
You can create a list of contacts for scanning to email or locations for scanning to a network folder or
FTP.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
your administrator for assistance. You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined
(including fax contacts).
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
3. Select Menu.
200
You see a screen like this:
Note: You can print your list of contacts and groups if necessary.
4. Select Add Entry.
You see a screen like this:
5. Do one of the following:
• To create a contact for scanning to email, select Scan to Email.
• To create a location for scanning to a network folder or FTP, select Scan to Network Folder/FTP.
6. Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
7. Select the Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters),
and press
.
201
8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters), and press
. (This field is optional.)
9. Do one of the following:
• For an email contact, select the Email address field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the
address, and press
.
• For a network folder or FTP location, select the Communication Mode field and select Network
Folder (SMB) or FTP. Then select the Location field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the
location, and press
. Enter other information if necessary.
10. Select Save.
Note: If you need to edit or delete scanning contacts, the procedures are the same as for fax contacts.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Editing or Deleting a Contact
Related topics
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs
You can view, change, or add available default scan settings when you scan using the Document
Capture Pro option on the product control panel. You do this by accessing the scan jobs in the Document
Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (OS X) program.
1. Start Document Capture Pro or Document Capture on a computer connected to the product.
2. Click the
Manage Job icon from the toolbar at the top of the window.
You see a window showing the current scan job list.
3. If you want to add a scan job, click Add or the + icon, enter a name for the new job, select settings
as necessary, and click OK.
You can now use the new scan job when you scan with Document Capture Pro or Document
Capture.
Note: See the Help information in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture for details.
202
4. If you want to assign scan jobs to the selection list on the product control panel, do one of the
following:
• Windows: Click Event Settings.
• OS X: Click the
icon at the bottom of the window, then click Event Settings.
5. Select the jobs that you want to assign to any of the pull-down menus, click OK, then click OK again.
You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Starting a Scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
When you scan with Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (OS X), the program
automatically saves your scanned file on your computer in the folder you specify. You can select
settings, preview, and change the scanned file settings as necessary.
1. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro or Document Capture:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
203
• Windows (other versions): Click
or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
EPSON Software, then select Document Capture Pro.
• OS X: Open the Applications folder, select the Epson Software folder, and select Document
Capture. Select your product and click OK, if necessary.
You see a window like this:
2. Click the
Scan icon.
204
You see a window like this:
Note: With OS X, you can download and install Epson Scan scanning software, which will provide
additional image adjustment features within Document Capture. To download Epson Scan, visit
Epson's driver download site (U.S. downloads or Canadian downloads).
3. If you want to use a scan job that you created instead, select it from the Job list in the Document
Capture Pro or Document Capture window, click the
Start Job button, and skip the rest of these
steps.
4. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use.
Note: See the Help information in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture for details.
5. If you want to select detailed scan settings, do one of the following:
• Windows: Click Detailed Settings. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use and click
OK.
205
• OS X: If you installed Epson Scan, close the Scan Settings window, open the Scan menu at the
top of the screen and select Displays the EPSON Scan Setup Screen. Click the
Scan icon.
Select any displayed scan settings you want to use and click OK.
6. Click Scan.
You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture Pro or Document Capture window.
7. Check the scanned images and edit them as necessary.
8. Click one of the Destination icons to choose where to save your scanned file.
Note: You may need to click the arrow next to the icons in order to see all of them. The available
icons may vary, depending on the software version you are using.
9. Select settings as necessary, then click OK, Send, or Print to save the scanned file.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan Icon
You can start the Epson Scan program to select scan settings, scan, and save the scanned image to a
file.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select EPSON Scan under EPSON or EPSON
Software.
• Windows (other versions): Click
or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select EPSON
or EPSON Software and click EPSON Scan.
• OS X: Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and double-click the EPSON
Scan icon.
Note: With OS X, in addition to scanning with Image Capture, you can download and install Epson
Scan scanning software. Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction
features for enhancing scanned images, and provides an interface for TWAIN-compliant OCR
206
scanning software. To download Epson Scan, visit Epson's driver download site (U.S. downloads or
Canadian downloads).
You see an Epson Scan window like this:
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
207
Related tasks
Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning - Windows
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program
You can start Epson Scan from a scanning program to select scan settings, scan, and open the scanned
image in the program.
Note: With OS X, in addition to scanning with Image Capture, you can download and install Epson Scan
scanning software. Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for
enhancing scanned images, and provides an interface for TWAIN-compliant OCR scanning software. To
download Epson Scan, visit Epson's driver download site (U.S. downloads or Canadian downloads).
1. Open your scanning program and select its scanning option. (See your scanning program help for
instructions.)
2. Select your product.
Note: In certain programs, you may need to select your product as the "source" first. If you see a
Select Source option, choose it and select your product. With Windows, do not select a WIA option
for your product; it will not work correctly.
208
You see an Epson Scan window like this:
Note: Epson Scan may start in a different mode when you first access it.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
209
Related tasks
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning - Windows
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Selecting Epson Scan Settings
After starting Epson Scan, you can select settings in various modes to customize your scan.
Scan Modes
Selecting the Scan Mode
Scanning in Office Mode
Scanning in Professional Mode
Image Preview Guidelines
Scan Resolution Guidelines
Selecting Scan File Settings
Parent topic: Scanning
Scan Modes
Epson Scan provides a choice of scan modes with different levels of control over your settings.
Office Mode
You can quickly scan text documents and adjust them on a preview screen. You can also select
various image adjustment options and preview your scanned image.
Professional Mode
You can manually customize all available settings, and preview and size your scanned image.
Parent topic: Selecting Epson Scan Settings
210
Selecting the Scan Mode
Select the Epson Scan mode you want to use from the Mode box in the upper right corner of the Epson
Scan window:
Parent topic: Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Scanning in Office Mode
When you scan in Office Mode, Epson Scan automatically saves your scanned file in PDF format in your
operating system's Documents or My Documents folder, or opens it in your scanning program. You can
select settings, preview, and change the scanned file settings as necessary.
1. Start Epson Scan and select Office Mode as the Mode setting.
211
You see this window:
2. Select the Document Source setting indicating where you placed your original. To scan a 2-sided
document in the ADF, select ADF-Double-sided.
Note: If you are using the ADF, remove any documents from the scanner glass.
212
3. Select the Size and Orientation settings that match your original.
4. To scan both sides of a 2-sided original into one image, select a Stitch Images setting.
Note: To use the Stitch Images setting, you must select ADF-Double-sided as the Document
Source setting.
5. To allow Epson Scan to detect and correct any skew in your original, select Correct Document
Skew.
6. To rotate your original in your scan, select a Rotate setting.
7. Select the Image Type setting that matches your original.
8. Select the Resolution setting you want to use for your scan.
9. Click the Preview button.
Epson Scan previews your original and displays the result in a separate Preview window.
10. If you are using the ADF, reinsert your original into the ADF.
11. If desired, select the area in your preview image that you want to scan (scan area).
Note: You cannot select a scan area if you chose ADF-Double-sided as the Document Source
setting.
12. Click the Image Adjustment tab and select any of the image adjustment settings you want to use.
Before making adjustments, click the image or scan area in the Preview window.
13. Click Scan.
You see the File Save Settings window.
14. Change any of the necessary file save settings and click OK.
Epson Scan scans your original, and saves the file in the selected folder or opens it in your scanning
program. If the file was saved directly to your computer, you see the file in the Windows Explorer or OS X
Finder, where you can view and print the image, if desired.
Available Document Source Settings - Office Mode
Selecting a Scan Area - Office Mode
Available Image Adjustments - Office Mode
Parent topic: Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Related concepts
Image Preview Guidelines
213
Scan Resolution Guidelines
Related tasks
Scanning in Professional Mode
Selecting Scan File Settings
Available Document Source Settings - Office Mode
You can select these Document Source options in Epson Scan Office Mode.
Scanner Glass
Selects the scanner glass as the location where the originals are placed on your product for scanning.
ADF - Single-sided
Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your
product for single-sided scanning.
ADF - Double-sided
Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your
product for double-sided scanning.
Auto Detect
Automatically detects where the originals are placed on your product for scanning.
Parent topic: Scanning in Office Mode
Selecting a Scan Area - Office Mode
You can select a specific area in your preview image to include in your scanned image. You can select
the entire image area or a portion of it. You can even select multiple scan areas to create multiple
scanned images of different areas.
You can also use the scan area to select specific Image Adjustments settings for a scanned image. Just
be sure to click inside the scan area before selecting the settings.
214
1. In the Preview window, click the
preview image.
Auto Locate icon to create a marquee (dotted line) on the
2. Do the following, as necessary, to work with the selected scan area:
• If the marquee is correct, continue with the next step.
• To move the marquee, click inside the scan area and drag the marquee where you want it.
215
• To resize the scan area, place your cursor over the edge or corner of the marquee, then click and
drag the edges where you want them. (Hold down the Shift key as you resize the marquee to
retain the same width/height proportions.)
• To create additional marquees (up to 50, if available), click the
existing marquee and paste it on the preview image.
Copy Marquee icon to copy the
Note: If you draw multiple marquees, make sure you select the All button in the Preview window
before you scan. Otherwise, only the area inside the currently selected marquee will be scanned.
• To delete a marquee, click the marquee, then click the
Delete Marquee icon.
• To rotate your original in your scan, click one of the Rotate icons.
3. Click inside each scan area and make any necessary settings in the Epson Scan window.
Parent topic: Scanning in Office Mode
Related concepts
Image Preview Guidelines
Scan Resolution Guidelines
Related tasks
Selecting Scan File Settings
216
Available Image Adjustments - Office Mode
You can select these Image Adjustments options in Epson Scan Office Mode. Not all adjustment settings
may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Note: Select the Image Option checkbox if you need to set any of the grayed-out image adjustments
beneath the checkbox. Not all adjustment settings may be available, depending on the Image Type
setting.
Unsharp Mask
Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer. Turn off this option to leave softer edges.
Descreening
Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas, such as skin tones. This
option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers. (The results of descreening do not
appear in the preview image, only in your scanned image.)
Text Enhancement
Sharpens the appearance of letters in text documents.
Auto Area Segmentation
Makes grayscale images clearer and text recognition more accurate by separating the text from the
graphics.
Color Enhance
Enhances the red, green, or blue shades in the scanned image.
217
Skip Blank Pages
Ensures that your product does not scan pages that contain no text or images.
Edge Fill
Corrects shadowing around the edges of the image by filling the shadows with the color you select.
Brightness
Adjusts the overall lightness and darkness of the scanned image.
Contrast
Adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of the overall scanned image.
Threshold
Adjusts the level at which black areas in text and line art are delineated, improving text recognition in
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) programs.
Parent topic: Scanning in Office Mode
Scanning in Professional Mode
When you scan in Professional Mode, Epson Scan automatically saves your scanned file in PDF format
in your operating system's Documents or My Documents folder, or opens it in your scanning program.
You can select settings, preview, and change the scanned file settings as necessary.
1. Start Epson Scan and select Professional Mode as the Mode setting.
218
You see this window:
219
2. Select the Document Type setting that matches your original, such as Reflective for documents or
photos.
3. Select the Document Source setting indicating where you placed your original. To scan a 2-sided
document in the ADF, select ADF - Double-sided.
Note: If you are using the ADF, remove any documents from the scanner glass.
4. Select the specific type of original you are scanning as the Auto Exposure Type setting: Document
or Photo.
5. Select the details of your original and how you want it scanned as the Image Type setting.
6. Select the Resolution setting you want to use for your scan.
7. Click the Preview button.
Epson Scan previews your original and displays the result in a separate Preview window.
8. If you are using the ADF, reinsert your original into the ADF.
9. If desired, select the area in your preview image that you want to scan (scan area).
Note: You cannot select a scan area if you chose ADF-Double-sided as the Document Source
setting.
10. Select any of the image adjustment settings you want to use. Before making adjustments, click the
image or scan area in the Preview window.
11. If you want to reduce or enlarge your image as you scan, select the Target Size setting you want to
use.
Note: You cannot select a target size if you chose ADF-Double-sided as the Document Source
setting.
12. Click Scan.
You see the File Save Settings window.
13. Change any of the necessary file save settings and click OK.
Epson Scan scans your original, and saves the file in the selected folder or opens it in your scanning
program. If the file was saved directly to your computer, you see the file in the Windows Explorer or OS X
Finder, where you can view and print the image, if desired.
Available Document Source Settings - Professional Mode
220
Available Image Types - Professional Mode
Selecting a Scan Area - Professional Mode
Available Image Adjustments - Professional Mode
Selecting a Scan Size - Professional Mode
Parent topic: Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Related concepts
Image Preview Guidelines
Scan Resolution Guidelines
Related tasks
Scanning in Office Mode
Selecting Scan File Settings
Available Document Source Settings - Professional Mode
You can select these Document Source options in Epson Scan Professional Mode.
Scanner Glass
Selects the scanner glass as the location where the originals are placed on your product for scanning.
ADF - Single-sided
Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your
product for single-sided scanning.
ADF - Double-sided
Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your
product for double-sided scanning.
Parent topic: Scanning in Professional Mode
Available Image Types - Professional Mode
You can select these Image Type options in Epson Scan Professional Mode.
24-bit Color
Select this setting for color photos.
Color Smoothing
Select this setting for color graphic images, such as charts or graphs.
8-bit Grayscale
Select this setting for black-and-white photos.
Black & White
Select this setting for black text documents or line art.
221
Parent topic: Scanning in Professional Mode
Selecting a Scan Area - Professional Mode
You can select a specific area in your preview image to include in your scanned image. You can select
the entire image area or a portion of it. You can even select multiple scan areas to create multiple
scanned images of different areas (Normal Preview mode only).
You can also use the scan area to select specific image Adjustments settings for a scanned image. Just
be sure to click inside the scan area before selecting the settings.
Note: In Professional Mode, the default Preview mode is Normal Preview mode. To use Thumbnail
Preview mode instead, click the Thumbnail tab.
222
1. Do one of the following to select your scan area in the Preview image:
• Normal preview: Click the
image.
Auto Locate icon to create a marquee (dotted line) on the preview
223
• Thumbnail preview: Your scan area is selected automatically, but you can change it. Place your
cursor in one corner of the desired scan area, then click and drag the cursor to the opposite corner
to create a marquee (dotted line) on the preview image.
2. Do the following, as necessary, to work with the selected scan area:
• If the marquee is correct, continue with the next step.
• To move the marquee, click inside the scan area and drag the marquee where you want it.
224
• To resize the scan area, place your cursor over the edge or corner of the marquee, then click and
drag the edges where you want them. (Hold down the Shift key as you resize the marquee to
retain the same width/height proportions.)
• Normal preview: To create additional marquees (up to 50, if available), click the
Marquee icon to copy the existing marquee and paste it on the preview image.
• To delete a marquee, click the marquee, then click the
Copy
Delete Marquee icon.
• Thumbnail preview: To change the preview style, click one of the Size icons.
Note: If you draw multiple marquees, make sure you select the All button in the Preview window
before you scan. Otherwise, only the area inside the currently selected marquee will be scanned.
3. Click inside the scan area and make any necessary settings in the Epson Scan window.
Parent topic: Scanning in Professional Mode
Available Image Adjustments - Professional Mode
You can select these Adjustments options in Epson Scan Professional Mode. Not all adjustment settings
may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Note: Select the Image Option checkbox if you need to set any of the grayed-out image adjustments
beneath the checkbox.
225
Click the
image adjustment icon to access additional settings.
Click the + (Windows) or
(OS X) icon next to a setting to change the level of adjustment.
Unsharp Mask
Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer. Turn off this option to leave softer edges.
Descreening
Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas, such as skin tones. This
option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers. (The results of descreening do not
appear in the preview image, only in your scanned image.)
Color Restoration
Restores the colors in faded photos automatically.
Backlight Correction
Removes shadows from photos that have too much background light.
Dust Removal
Removes dust marks from your originals automatically.
Color Enhance
Enhances the red, green, or blue shades in the scanned image.
Edge Fill
Corrects shadowing around the edges of the image by filling the shadows with the color you select.
Auto Exposure
Automatically adjusts the image exposure settings when you click the
Auto Exposure icon. To
automatically adjust image exposure settings continuously, click the Configuration button, click the
Color tab, and select Continuous auto exposure. You can adjust the level of auto exposure using a
slider.
Histogram Adjustment
Provides a graphical interface for adjusting highlight, shadow, and gamma levels individually. (For
advanced users only.) Click the
histogram icon to access the settings.
Tone Correction
Provides a graphical interface for adjusting tone levels individually. (For advanced users only.) Click
the
tone correction icon to access the settings.
Brightness
Adjusts the overall lightness and darkness of the scanned image.
Contrast
Adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of the overall scanned image.
226
Saturation
Adjusts the density of colors in the overall image.
Color Balance
Adjusts the balance of colors in the overall image.
Color Palette
Provides a graphical interface for adjusting mid-tone levels, such as skin tones, without affecting the
highlight and shadow areas of the image. (For advanced users only.) Click the
to access the settings.
Color Palette icon
Threshold
Adjusts the level at which black areas in text and line art are delineated, improving text recognition in
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) programs.
Parent topic: Scanning in Professional Mode
Selecting a Scan Size - Professional Mode
You can reduce or enlarge the size of your image as you scan. You can also select a specific scan size,
such as a common photo size like 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm). This places a scan area of that size on
the preview image so you can use it to help crop the image in the correct proportions.
1. Click the Preview button to preview your image.
2. In the Epson Scan window, select the size you want your scanned image to be from the Target Size
list.
Note: If you need to rotate the orientation of the target size for your image, click the
icon.
227
orientation
A marquee (dotted line) appears on your preview image proportioned for the size you selected.
3. Do the following, as necessary, to work with the selected scan area:
• To move the marquee, click inside the scan area and drag the marquee where you want it.
• To resize the scan area, place your cursor over the edge or corner of the marquee, then click and
drag the edge where you want it.
Note: Manually adjusting the marquee will not change the target size of the scanned file. The
marquee only indicates the area of the image that will be scanned.
228
4. To create a scanned image size that is not available in the Target Size list, click the Customize
option.
You see this window:
5. Name the custom size, enter the size, click Save, and click OK. Then adjust the marquee on the
preview image.
The marquee is automatically proportioned for your custom scan size.
229
6. To use additional sizing tools, click the + (Windows) or
and select options as desired.
(OS X) icon next to the Target Size setting
• Scale: Reduces or enlarges your image by the percentage you enter.
• Trimming: Turns automatic image cropping on or off.
•
Unlock icon: Unlocks the width/height proportions of the scanned image size so you can adjust
it without constraint.
Parent topic: Scanning in Professional Mode
Image Preview Guidelines
You can preview your scanned image so you can adjust the scan settings using the preview as a guide.
There are two types of preview available, depending on the scan mode and selected settings:
Thumbnail preview
A thumbnail preview displays your previewed images as thumbnails with the scanned image area and
exposure automatically selected.
Normal preview
A normal preview displays your previewed images in their entirety so you can select the scanned
image area and other settings manually.
Parent topic: Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Scan Resolution Guidelines
If you plan to enlarge a scanned image so you can print it at a larger size, you may need to increase the
resolution from the default resolution set by Epson Scan. Follow these guidelines to determine the
resolution setting you need:
• You will enlarge the image as you scan it.
If you will enlarge the image using Epson Scan's Target Size setting, you do not need to increase the
Resolution setting.
230
• You will scan the image at its original size but enlarge it later in an image-editing program.
Increase Epson Scan's Resolution setting in your scan. Increase the resolution by the same amount
you will increase the image size to retain a high image quality. For example, if the resolution is 300 dpi
(dots per inch) and you will double the image size later, change the Resolution setting to 600 dpi.
• You will scan the image at 100% or smaller size.
Select Epson Scan's Resolution setting based on how you will use the scanned image:
• Email/view on a computer screen/post on the web: 96 to 150 dpi
• Print/convert to editable text (OCR): 300 dpi
• Fax: 200 dpi
Parent topic: Selecting Epson Scan Settings
231
Selecting Scan File Settings
You can select the location, name, and format of your scan file on the File Save Settings window. You
can also select various optional settings that control how Epson Scan behaves when you scan and save
files.
The File Save Settings window may appear after you click Scan on the Epson Scan window. You may
also be able to access the window by clicking the
icon on the Epson Scan window.
1. Do one of the following to select the folder in which you want to save your scanned image:
• Click the button for one of the displayed folders.
232
• Click the Other button, click the Browse or Choose button, and select a folder.
2. If you want to change the default name for your scanned image, click Edit and select the options you
want.
3. Select the file format you want to use in the Image Format Type menu.
4. If your file format provides optional settings, click the Options button to select them.
5. Choose any of the optional settings you want to use by selecting their checkboxes.
6. Click OK.
If you selected PDF or Multi-TIFF as the Type setting, you see this window after Epson Scan scans
your document:
7. Choose one of the following options:
• If you are scanning only one page, click Save File.
• If you need to scan additional pages in a document, click Add page. Place additional pages on
the product for scanning, click Scan, and repeat until you have scanned all the pages. When you
are finished, click Save File.
233
• If you need to delete or reorder the scanned pages, click Edit page. Delete or reorder the pages
using the icons that appear on the bottom of the editing window. When you are finished, click OK.
Note: If you installed an OCR (Optical Character Recognition) program, you may see a screen
indicating the program is converting your page to text. Wait until the program re-scans the page and
close the program, if necessary.
Available Scanned File Types and Optional Settings
Parent topic: Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Available Scanned File Types and Optional Settings
You can select from a variety of scanned file types and optional settings on the File Save Settings
window in Epson Scan.
File Formats
Bitmap (*.bmp)
A standard image file format for most Windows programs.
JPEG (*.jpg)
An image format that lets you highly compress image data. However, the higher the compression, the
lower the image quality. (The TIFF format is recommended when you need to modify or retouch your
scanned image.)
Multi-TIFF (*.tif)
A TIFF file format when multiple pages are saved to the same file, allowing you to edit the images
using a compatible program.
PDF (*.pdf)
A document format that is readable by Windows and OS X systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or
other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file.
PICT (*.pct)
A standard image file format for most OS X programs.
TIFF (*.tif)
A file format created for exchanging data between many programs, such as graphic and DTP
software.
Optional Settings
Overwrite any files with the same name
Select to overwrite previous files with the same names.
234
Show this dialog box before next scan
Select to have the File Save Settings window appear automatically before you scan (in certain Epson
Scan modes).
Open image folder after scanning
Select to have Windows Explorer or OS X Finder automatically open to the folder where your scanned
image is saved after scanning.
Show Add Page dialog after scanning
If you are scanning a multi-page document using the PDF or Multi-TIFF format, select to display a
prompt for scanning additional pages after the first page is scanned.
Parent topic: Selecting Scan File Settings
Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture
With OS X 10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9, you can scan with your product using an image-editing application such
as Image Capture.
Note: With OS X, in addition to scanning with Image Capture, you can download and install Epson Scan
scanning software. Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for
enhancing scanned images, and provides an interface for TWAIN-compliant OCR scanning software. To
download Epson Scan, visit Epson's driver download site (U.S. downloads or Canadian downloads).
1. Open an image editing application, such as Image Capture.
2. Select your Epson product from the DEVICES or SHARED list, if necessary. (You may need to
hover over the DEVICES or SHARED list, click Show, and select your product.)
3. If you see the Show Details button, click it.
If you are scanning an item on the scanner glass, your product begins a preview scan.
235
4. Select the Scan Mode setting indicating where you placed your original (if available). Select any
other available scan settings as necessary.
236
Note: If you are scanning a multi-page document in the ADF, you can have Image Capture combine
all the pages into a single document. After all pages have been scanned, you see the message No
document loaded.
5. Select the folder in which you want to save your scanned file in the Scan To pop-up menu.
6. Click Scan.
Your scanned file is saved in the folder you selected.
Available Scan Settings - OS X Image Capture
Parent topic: Scanning
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Available Scan Settings - OS X Image Capture
You can select these scan settings in your imaging editing application for OS X, if available.
Image Correction
Provides a graphical interface for adjusting brightness, tint, temperature, and saturation.
Unsharp Mask
Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer. Turn off this option to leave softer edges.
Descreening
Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas, such as skin tones. This
option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers. (The results of descreening do not
appear in the preview image, only in your scanned image.)
Backlight Correction
Removes shadows from photos that have too much background light.
Dust Removal
Removes dust marks from your originals automatically.
Color Restoration
Restores the colors in faded photos automatically.
Quiet Mode
Reduces noise during scanning and may reduce scan speed.
Parent topic: Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture
237
Scanning Special Projects
Your product's scanning software offers various options to help you quickly complete special scan
projects.
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files
Parent topic: Scanning
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service
You can use Document Capture Pro to upload scanned images to a SharePoint server or a cloud
service.
1. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click
or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
EPSON Software, then select Document Capture Pro.
• OS X: Open the Applications folder, select the Epson Software folder, and select Document
Capture. Select your product and click OK, if necessary.
You see a window like this:
238
2. Click the
Scan icon.
3. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use.
Note: See the Help information in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture for details.
4. Click Scan.
You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture Pro or Document Capture window.
5. Click one of the cloud service Destination icons to choose where to save your scanned file.
•
Web Folder (WebDAV)
•
Evernote (Windows only)
•
Google Drive
•
SugarSync
•
Microsoft SharePoint server (Windows only)
Note: You may need to click the arrow next to the icons in order to see all of them. The available
icons may vary, depending on the software version you are using.
6. Select your Destination settings.
Note: The settings may vary, depending on the software version you are using. See the Help
information in Document Capture Pro or Document Capture for details.
7. Select any other scan settings as necessary, and click Send.
Your originals are scanned and uploaded to the indicated server.
Note: You can also create a scan job for uploading scanned images to a SharePoint server or a cloud
service. You can use the scan job when you scan with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture or
when you scan using the Document Capture Pro option on the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning Special Projects
239
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files
You can use Document Capture Pro (Windows only) to scan multi-page originals as separate scanned
files. You indicate where you want the new scanned files to start by inserting a blank page or barcode
between the pages of your original.
Note: The settings may vary, depending on the software version you are using. See the Help information
in Document Capture Pro for details.
1. Load a multi-page original with blank pages or barcodes inserted where you want to start a new
scanned file.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click
or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
EPSON Software, then select Document Capture Pro.
You see this window:
3. Click the
Scan icon.
240
4. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use.
Note: See the Help information in Document Capture Pro for details.
5. Click Scan.
You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture Pro window.
6. Open the File menu and select Batch Save.
7. Click File Name Settings.
8. Select Apply Job Separation and click Separation Settings.
9. Select the method you used to separate the originals, select a folder name specification and click
OK.
10. Select any other settings from the File Name settings window as necessary and click OK.
11. Select any other settings from the Batch Save window as necessary and click OK.
Your originals are saved into separate files as specified.
Note: You can also create a scan job for scanning multi-page originals as separate scanned files. You
can use the scan job when you scan with Document Capture Pro or when you scan using the Document
Capture Pro option on the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning Special Projects
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning - Windows
If Access Control is enabled on the product, a user ID and password may be required to scan. You can
enter the user ID and password in Epson Scan Settings.
Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Do one of the following to access Epson Scan Settings:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select EPSON Scan Settings.
• Windows (other versions): Click
Scan > EPSON Scan Settings.
or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > EPSON
2. Click the Access Control button.
3. Enter your user name and password.
241
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Scanning
242
Faxing
See these sections to fax using your product.
Note: This product allows you to store names, telephone numbers, and fax data in its memory even
when the power is turned off. Make sure you restore all of the default settings if you give away or dispose
of the product. This will erase all of your network settings and fax data.
Note: When using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product,
you can fax using the printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software. To
download the standard Epson printer software, go to epson.com/support/wf8590.
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Sending Faxes
Receiving Faxes
Checking Fax Status
Printing Fax Reports
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
You must connect your product to a telephone wall jack to send or receive faxes. If you want to use the
same telephone line to receive calls, you can connect a telephone or answering machine to your product
using an additional phone cable.
Note: If you do not connect a telephone to your product, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto.
Otherwise, you cannot receive faxes.
243
1. Connect a phone cable to your telephone wall jack and to the LINE port on your product.
Note: If you have a DSL or ISDN connection, you must connect the appropriate DSL filter, or ISDN
terminal adapter or router to the wall jack to be able to use the line for faxing or voice calls using your
product. Contact your DSL or ISDN provider for the necessary equipment.
244
DSL connection
1
Telephone wall jack
2
DSL filter
3
DSL modem
245
ISDN connection
1
ISDN wall jack
2
Terminal adapter or ISDN router
246
2. If you are connecting a telephone or answering machine to your product using a second phone
cable, remove the cap from the EXT port on your product.
247
3. Connect a second phone cable to your telephone or answering machine and to the EXT port on your
product.
Note: If you connect an answering machine and Receive Mode is set to Auto, set the number of
rings before your product answers a call to a number that is higher than your answering machine's
setting for the number of rings.
Any phone or answering machine must be connected to the EXT port for your product to detect an
incoming fax call when the phone is picked up. Epson cannot guarantee compatibility with VoIP,
cable phone systems, or fiberoptic digital services such as FIOS.
Parent topic: Faxing
Related tasks
Receiving Faxes Automatically
248
Setting Up Fax Features
Before faxing with your product, set up your fax header and select the fax features you want to use.
Note: If you leave your product unplugged for a long period of time, you may need to reset the date and
time settings for faxes.
Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Windows
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - OS X
Parent topic: Faxing
Setting Up Basic Fax Features
See these sections to select the basic settings you need to use the product's fax features.
Selecting Your Country or Region
Selecting the Date and Time
Using the Fax Setup Wizard
Selecting the Line Type
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Selecting Your Country or Region
Before faxing, select the country or region in which you are using your product.
Note: If you change the country or region, your fax settings return to their defaults and you must select
them again. This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
249
2. Select Setup.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select Common Settings.
5. Scroll down and select Country/Region.
6. Scroll up or down, if necessary, and select your country or region.
You see a confirmation screen.
7. If the setting is correct, select Yes. (If not, select No and retry.)
Note: Changing the country or region restores the fax settings to the default settings.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
250
Selecting the Date and Time
Before faxing, select the current date, time, and daylight saving phase in your area, and choose your
preferred date and time format.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
251
4. Select Common Settings.
5. Select Date/Time Settings.
You see a screen like this:
6. Select Daylight Saving Time.
7. Select the setting that applies to your area:
• Winter: it is winter or your region does not use Daylight Saving Time (DST)
• Summer: it is spring or summer and your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Note: If your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST), you must change this setting to match the
season. When you change from Winter to Summer, your product automatically sets its clock ahead
one hour. When you change from Summer to Winter, it sets its clock back one hour.
8. Select Date/Time.
252
9. Select the date format you want to use.
10. Use the numeric keypad to enter the current date.
11. Select the time format you want to use.
12. Use the numeric keypad to enter the current time.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Using the Fax Setup Wizard
You can setup the product's basic fax settings using the Fax Setting Wizard. This wizard is automatically
displayed when the product is turned on for the first time. You can also change these settings individually
from the Fax Settings menu.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change these setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
253
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Scroll down and select Fax Settings.
5. Scroll down and select Fax Setting Wizard.
The Fax Setting Wizard screen appears.
6. Select Start.
7. On the Fax Header screen, use the displayed keypad to enter the sender name for your fax source,
such as your name or a business name. You can enter up to 40 characters.
8. On the Your Phone Number screen, use the displayed keypad to enter your fax number, up to 20
characters.
Note: The name and phone number in the fax header identifies the source of the faxes you send.
9. On the Distinctive Ring Setting screen, do one of the following:
• If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, select Proceed.
Select the ring pattern to be used for incoming faxes or select On. Go to step 12.
• If you do not have a distinctive ring service, select Skip and go to the next step.
Note: Distinctive ring services allows you to have several phone numbers on one phone line. Each
number is assigned a different ring pattern. You can use one number for voice calls and another for
fax calls. Select the ring pattern assigned to fax calls in the DRD Setting. If you select On or a ring
pattern other than All, Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto.
254
10. On the Receive Mode Setting screen, do one of the following:
• If you have connected an external telephone or answering machine to the product, select Yes and
go to the next step.
• If you did not connect an external telephone or answering machine, select No and go to step 12.
(Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto; otherwise you cannot receive faxes.)
11. On the next Receive Mode Setting screen, select Yes to receive faxes automatically or select No to
receive faxes manually.
Note: If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make
sure the Rings to Answer setting is correct. If you select to receive faxes manually, you need to
answer every call and operate the product’s control panel or your phone to receive faxes.
12. On the Confirm Settings screen, confirm the displayed settings and select Proceed, or press
to change the settings.
back
13. On the Run Check Fax Connection screen, select Start and follow the on-screen instructions to
check the fax connection and print a report of the check result. If there are any errors reported, try
the solutions on the report and run the check again.
Note:
• If the Select Line Type screen appears, select the correct line type.
• If the Select Dial Tone Detection screen appears, select Disable. However, disabling the dial tone
detection function may drop the first digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Selecting the Line Type
If you connect the product to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter, you must change the product's
line type. PBX (Private Branch Exchange) is used in office environments where an external access code
such as “9” must be dialed to call an outside line. The default Line Type setting is PSTN (Public Switched
Telephone Network), which is a standard home phone line.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact
your administrator for assistance.
255
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Scroll down and select Fax Settings.
5. Select Basic Settings.
6. Select Line Type.
7. Select PBX.
256
You see a screen like this:
8. Select Use.
9. Select Access Code.
10. Use the displayed keypad to enter the access code, such as 9, and select OK.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer
If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make sure the
Rings to Answer setting is correct. The number of rings should be higher than the number of rings your
answering machine is set to for answering a call.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
257
2. Select Setup.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Scroll down and select Fax Settings.
5. Select Receive Settings.
258
6. Select Rings to Answer.
7. Select the number of rings and select OK. Make sure to select a number higher than the number of
rings your answering machine is set to for answering a call.
Note: An answering machine picks up every call faster than the product, but the product can detect fax
tones and start receiving faxes. If you answer the phone and hear a fax tone, check that the product has
started receiving the fax, then hang up the phone.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
You can select a variety of advanced fax settings.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change these setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
259
2. Select Setup.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Scroll down and select Fax Settings.
You see a screen like this:
260
5. Select the group of settings you want to change.
User Default Settings - Fax
Send Settings - Fax
Receive Settings - Fax
Output Settings - Fax
Basic Settings - Fax
Security Settings - Fax
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
User Default Settings - Fax
Set the default settings you want to use for faxing.
Setting
Options
Description
Resolution
Standard
Adjusts the scan resolution and print quality of
outgoing faxes.
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Photo
Density
Document Size (Glass)
Auto
Automatically adjusts the darkness of outgoing
faxes. Select this option when sending black-andwhite text documents.
Manual
Lets you select from various density levels.
Half Letter
Sets the size for a document placed on the scanner
glass.
A5
Letter
Legal
A4
11x17in
A3
261
Setting
Options
Description
ADF 2-Sided
Off
Select On to enable 2-sided faxing from the ADF.
The Direct Send option and color faxing are disabled
when you turn on this setting.
On
Direct Send
Off
Select On to send black-and-white faxes to a single
recipient as soon as the connection is made, without
saving the scanned image to memory. You cannot
use this setting when sending a color fax or sending
a fax to multiple recipients.
On
Continuous Scan from
ADF
Off
Transmission Report
Print on Error
Select On to have the product to ask if you want to
scan another page after a document in the ADF has
finished scanning.
On
Lets you select when to print transmission reports.
Print
Do Not Print
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Send Settings - Fax
Set the send options you want to use for outgoing faxes.
Setting
Options
Description
Auto Rotation
Off
Sends an A4 or letter-size document that is placed
long edge first into the ADF as an A3-size fax.
On
Batch Send
Off
Sorts outgoing faxes by recipient in the product's
memory, and then sends them as a batch.
On
Save Failure Data
Off
Saves faxes that failed to be sent in the product’s
memory. You can resend the faxes from the product's
Status Menu.
On
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Receive Settings - Fax
Set the receive options you want to use for incoming faxes.
262
Setting
Options
Description
Receive Mode
Manual
Lets you confirm whether an incoming fax should be
printed; a telephone must be connected to the product
Auto
Automatically receives and prints faxes.
All
If you are using a Distinctive Ring Service on your
phone line, your telephone company can assign two
or more phone numbers to the same line and assign
different ring patterns to each. If you use this service,
select the number of rings for your fax number so your
product can receive faxes on the correct number of
rings. Select All for phones lines that do not use this
service.
Distinctive Ring
Single
Double
Triple
Double&Triple
Rings to Answer
1 to 9
Sets the number of rings before your product receives
a fax. If Receive Mode is set to Auto and an
answering machine is connected to the product, make
sure this setting is set higher than the number of rings
your answering machine is set to answer a call.
Remote Receive
Off
Lets you start receiving faxes using your phone
instead of operating the product (if the Receive Mode
is set to Auto). When you select On, you must also
set a Start Code. If you are using a cordless handset
with its base connected to the product, you can start
receiving the fax by entering the code using the
handset.
On
Start Code
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Output Settings - Fax
Set the output options you want to use for incoming faxes.
Note: If you select Save to Inbox, faxes are saved in the product's memory. Delete faxes after viewing
or printing them to prevent the memory from filling up. Even if you select other options for saving faxes,
they may be saved temporarily in the product's memory.
263
Setting
Options
Description
Fax Output
Other Settings
Lets you create a folder for saving faxes on a memory
device and select settings for forwarding faxes.
Save to Inbox
Saves incoming faxes in the product's memory. You
can view the faxes on the LCD screen and print if
needed.
Save to Computer
To use this option, you must use the Epson FAX
Utility. Select Yes and Print to have faxes saved to
your computer and printed automatically.
Save to Memory
Device
Saves incoming faxes to a connected memory device
or USB storage device. Select Yes and Print to have
faxes saved to the memory device and printed
automatically.
Forward
Forwards incoming faxes to as many as 5 numbers in
your contact list. Select Yes and Print to have faxes
forwarded and printed automatically. Color faxes
cannot be forwarded.
On
Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit
on the paper size in the selected paper source.
Off
Select to print large incoming faxes at their original
size on multiple sheets, if necessary.
On
If you have loaded A5-size paper, select On to rotate
landscape-oriented incoming faxes so that they print
correctly on the paper.
Auto Reduction
Auto Rotation
Off
Collation Stack
On
Select On to print incoming faxes so that the pages
are stacked in the correct page order. (When the
product is low on memory, this option may not be
available.)
Off
Print Suspend Time
Off
Select On to set a time period to stop automatic
printing of faxes or reports and save received faxes in
the product’s memory. (Make sure there is enough
free memory before using this function.)
On
Time to Stop
Restart Time
264
Setting
Options
Description
Forwarding Report
Print on Error
Selects whether or when to print a report after an
incoming fax is forwarded.
Print
Do Not Print
Attach Image to Report
Off
Does not include an image of the fax on transmission
reports.
On(Small Image)
Prints transmission reports with an image of the first
faxed page. (Does not work when you select Direct
Send.)
On(Large Image)
Fax Log Auto Print
Report Format
Off
Does not print the fax log.
On(Every 30)
Prints the fax log after 30 faxes are sent or received.
On(Time)
Prints the fax log at a time you select using the
numeric keypad displayed on the LCD screen.
Simple
Selects the amount of information on fax reports.
Detail
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Basic Settings - Fax
Set the basic options you want to use for incoming and outgoing faxes.
Setting
Options
Description
Fax Speed
Fast(33,600bps)
Sets the speed at which you send and receive faxes.
Medium(14,400bps)
Slow(9,600bps)
ECM
On
Turns on Error Correction Mode (ECM) to
automatically correct errors in sent or received fax
data.
Off
Turns off Error Correction Mode (ECM); color faxes
cannot be sent or received.
265
Setting
Options
Description
Dial Tone Detection
On
Automatically dials the number you enter for faxing
when the product detects a dial tone.
Off
Turns off automatic dial tone detection, which may
be necessary if the product is connected to a PBX
(Private Branch Exchange) or a TA (Terminal
Adapter). However, turning this setting off may cause
the product to drop the first digit of a fax number.
PSTN
Selects a standard phone line (Public Switched
Telephone Network).
PBX
Selects Private Branch Exchange, the type of phone
line used in office environments where an access
code such as 9 must be used to call an outside line.
Fax Header
Select to enter the header information and your
phone number for inclusion on outgoing faxes.
Line Type
Header
Your Phone
Number
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Security Settings - Fax
Set the security options you want to use for fax data.
Setting
Options
Description
Direct Dialing
Restrictions
Off
Does not restrict dialed fax numbers.
On
Allows faxing only to numbers stored in the contacts
list or history.
Enter Twice
Requires you to enter fax numbers twice to prevent
errors.
Off
Selects whether or not to display a recipient
confirmation screen before a fax is sent.
Confirm Address List
On
Inbox Password
Settings
Register
Select to set a password for viewing incoming faxes.
266
Setting
Options
Description
Backup Data Auto Clear Off
Automatically erases sent or received fax data from
your product's memory.
On
Clear Backup Data
—
Deletes all sent or received fax data remaining in your
product's memory; run this function if you are giving
away or disposing of your product.
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Windows
You can set up your fax header and select your fax settings using the FAX Utility for Windows.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen.
• Windows (other versions): Click
or Start > Programs or All Programs > EPSON Software.
2. Select FAX Utility.
You see this window:
267
3. Select Fax Settings for Printer. (Select your product, if prompted.)
You see this window:
4. Select Fax Settings.
5. Follow the prompts that appear on the screen to enter your fax header information and select your
fax settings.
Note: For detailed information, select the FAX Utility Help option.
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - OS X
You can set up your fax header and select your fax settings using the FAX Utility for OS X.
1. Do one of the following:
• OS X 10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
268
• OS X 10.5: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax,
select your product, and select Open Print Queue. Select Utility.
2. Double-click FAX Utility, if necessary.
You see this window:
3. Select your FAX product in the Printer list.
4. Select Fax Settings.
5. Follow the prompts that appear on the screen to enter your fax header information and select your
fax settings.
Note: For detailed information, select the FAX Utility ? icon.
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
You can set up a list of contacts and their fax numbers so you can quickly select them for faxing. You
can also set up contact groups to send a fax message to multiple contacts.
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up Speed/Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility - Windows
Setting Up Speed/Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility - OS X
Parent topic: Faxing
269
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
You can set up your contacts and contact groups using the control panel on your product.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
your administrator for assistance.
Creating a Contact
Editing or Deleting a Contact
Creating a Contact Group
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Related tasks
Setting Up Speed/Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility - Windows
Setting Up Speed/Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility - OS X
Creating a Contact
You can create a list of contacts to save frequently used fax numbers.
Note: You can create up to 100 contacts and contact groups combined.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
270
You see a screen like this:
4. Select Menu.
You see a screen like this:
Note: You can print your list of contacts and groups if necessary.
5. Select Add Entry.
6. Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
271
You see a screen like this:
7. Select the Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters),
and press
.
8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters), and press
. (This field is optional.)
9. Select the Fax Number field, and use the numeric keypad on the LCD screen or the buttons on the
product to enter the fax number. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Note: If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax number.
If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign instead of the
code.
10. Set the Fax Speed, if necessary.
11. Select Save.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Editing or Deleting a Contact
You can edit or delete any of the contacts on your list.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
272
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the contact you want to edit or delete.
You see a screen like this:
5. Do one of the following:
• To delete the contact, select Delete and select Yes on the confirmation screen.
• To edit the contact, select Edit, select the item you want to change, enter the correct information,
and select
. When you are finished editing, select Save.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Creating a Contact Group
You can create a group of contacts so that you can easily send faxes to multiple recipients.
273
Note: You can create up to 100 contacts and contact groups combined.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select Menu.
You see a screen like this:
Note: You can print your list of contacts and groups if necessary.
5. Select Add Group.
6. Select the number you want to use for the group you are adding.
274
You see a screen like this:
7. Select the Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the group name (up to 30 characters)
and press
.
8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for a
group (up to 30 characters) and press
. (This field is optional.)
9. Select Proceed.
You see your contacts list.
10. Select the number next to each contact you want to include in your group.
A check mark appears next to each selected contact.
11. Select Save.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group
You can edit an existing contact group to add or delete entries. You can also delete the entire contact
group.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
275
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
You see a screen like this, showing both individual contacts and contact groups:
4. Select the group you want to edit.
276
You see a screen like this:
Note: If you want to delete the entire group, select Delete.
5. To edit the group, select Edit.
6. Select Proceed.
You see a list of the contacts in your group.
7. To add or delete a contact, select the number next to it.
8. Select Save.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up Speed/Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility - Windows
You can set up your speed dial and group dial lists using the FAX Utility for Windows. The utility also lets
you import fax numbers from the Windows Address Book and back up fax numbers stored in your
product's memory.
Note: You can create up to 60 speed dial and group dial entries combined.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen.
• Windows (other versions): Click
or Start > Programs or All Programs > EPSON Software.
2. Select FAX Utility.
277
You see this window:
3. Select Fax Settings for Printer. (Select your product, if prompted.)
278
You see this window:
4. Select Speed Dial/Group Dial List.
279
You see this window:
5. Select an empty entry and click the
icon.
Note: To edit an entry, select it and click the
icon.
icon. To delete an entry, select it and click the
6. Do one of the following:
• To create a speed dial entry, select Speed Dial, enter a name and fax number, and click OK.
• To create a group dial entry, select Group, enter a name, select your desired fax numbers, and
click OK.
7. Repeat the previous steps as necessary to add all your speed dial or group dial entries.
8. When you are finished, click the
icon to save the entries to your product's memory.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Related topics
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
280
Setting Up Speed/Group Dial Lists Using the Fax Utility - OS X
You can set up your speed dial and group dial lists using the FAX Utility. The utility also lets you import
fax numbers from the MacAddress Book and back up fax numbers to your product's memory.
Note: You can create up to 60 speed dial and group dial entries combined.
1. Do one of the following:
• OS X 10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
• OS X 10.5: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax,
select your product, and select Open Print Queue. Select Utility.
2. Double-click FAX Utility, if necessary.
You see this window:
3. Select your FAX product in the Printer list.
4. Select Speed Dial/Group Dial List.
281
You see this window:
5. To add an entry, double-click an empty entry.
Note: To edit an entry, select it and change the information. To delete an entry, select it and press
the Delete key on your keyboard.
6. Do one of the following:
• To create a speed dial entry, select Speed Dial, enter a name and fax number, and click OK.
• To create a group dial entry, select Group Dial, enter a name, select your desired fax numbers,
and click OK.
7. Repeat the previous steps as necessary to add all your speed dial or group dial entries.
8. To import entries from your MacAddress book, click the
9. When you are finished, click the
icon.
icon to save the entries to your product's memory.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Related topics
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
282
Sending Faxes
See these sections to send faxes using your product.
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - OS X
Parent topic: Faxing
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
See these sections to send faxes using the product's control panel.
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History
Fax Sending Options
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time
Sending a Fax on Demand
Sending a Stored Fax
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History
You can send a fax from your product control panel by entering the fax number, or selecting the number
from either the contact list or fax history.
Note: You can send a black-and-white fax to up to 200 recipients at a time, or send a color fax to one
recipient at a time. If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in
black-and-white.
Note: The product can queue up to 50 black-and-white fax jobs. You can check or cancel fax jobs in the
queue using the Status Menu.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the
home button, if necessary.
283
3. Select Fax.
Note: To fax a double-sided document, place your document in the ADF and turn on the ADF 2Sided setting. (You cannot fax double-sided documents in color.)
4. Do one of the following to select fax recipients:
• Manually enter a fax number: Press the Enter a Fax Number field and enter a fax number.
Press
when done. To add another fax number, repeat the same steps. You can also use the
numeric keypad on the control panel to enter a fax number.
Note: If direct dialing has been restricted, you can only select the number from the contact list or
fax history. If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax
number. If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign
instead of the code.
• Select from the contact list: Select Contacts to display the contact list screen. Select the
checkbox next to one or more contact (select the checkbox again to deselect it). You can also
select the Search field to search for recipients by name, index name, or entry number. Select
Proceed when you are finished.
• Select from the sent fax history: Select History to display the sent fax history. Select a recipient
from the list, select Menu, and select Send to this number.
Note: To delete entered recipients, select the Enter a Fax Number field, select the recipient you
want to delete, and select Delete from the List.
5. If you need to change any fax settings, select Menu, select Fax Send Settings, and select your
settings.
284
6. If you want to preview your fax in black-and-white on the LCD, select Preview. (If the preview looks
incorrect, select Retry, reposition the document or change the fax settings, and repeat this step.)
Note: If you do not touch the preview screen for 20 seconds, your product sends the fax
automatically. You cannot preview images when the Direct Send setting is turned on.
7. If you want to save your fax settings for later use, select Presets and add a new entry.
8. Press one of the
buttons.
Note: To cancel faxing, press the
from the Status Menu.
Stop button. You can also cancel the job or check the job status
Your product scans your original and prompts you to place additional pages, if necessary.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax.
Note: Your product does not save sent color faxes to its memory. If the Save Failure Data option is
enabled, faxes that failed to be sent are stored to the product's memory and you can resend them from
the Status Menu screen.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Using Presets
Selecting the Line Type
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Fax Sending Options
While sending a fax, you can select Menu and select these options from the Fax Send Settings menu.
Note: You can also select these options in the User Default Settings menu.
285
Setting
Options
Description
Resolution
Standard
Adjusts the scan resolution and print quality of
outgoing faxes.
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Photo
Density
Document Size (Glass)
Auto
Automatically adjusts the darkness of outgoing faxes.
Select this option when sending black-and-white text
documents.
Manual
Lets you select from various density levels.
Half Letter
Sets the size for a document placed on the scanner
glass.
A5
Letter
Legal
A4
11x17in
A3
ADF 2-Sided
Off
Select On to enable 2-sided faxing from the ADF. The
Direct Send option and color faxing are disabled when
you turn on this setting.
On
Direct Send
Off
Select On to send black-and-white faxes to a single
recipient as soon as the connection is made, without
saving the scanned image to memory. You cannot
use this setting when sending a color fax or sending a
fax to multiple recipients.
On
Priority Send
Off
Select On to send the current fax before other faxes
waiting to be sent.
On
Continuous Scan from
ADF
Off
Select On to have the product to ask if you want to
scan another page after a document in the ADF has
finished scanning.
On
286
Setting
Options
Description
Transmission Report
Print on Error
Lets you select when to print transmission reports.
Print
Do Not Print
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time
You can send a fax at a time of your choice.
Note: Make sure the product's date and time settings are correct. You can only send faxes in black-andwhite when you use this option.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the
home button, if necessary.
3. Select Fax.
Note: To fax a double-sided document, place your document in the ADF and turn on the ADF 2Sided setting.
4. Enter a fax number or select a number from the Contacts list or History.
5. Select Menu.
6. Select Send Fax Later.
7. Select On.
287
8. Select Time, use the displayed keypad on the LCD screen to enter your desired time, and select
OK.
9. Press one of the
buttons.
Note: To cancel faxing, press the
Stop button.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax at the specified time.
Note: If the product is turned off at the specified time, the fax is sent when it is powered on.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Selecting the Date and Time
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Sending a Fax on Demand
You can store one scanned document (up to 100 black-and-white pages) and have it sent automatically
when another fax machine requests it. Other fax users can receive the document by calling your fax
number and using the polling receive function on their fax machines.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the
home button, if necessary.
288
3. Select Fax.
4. Select Menu.
5. Select Polling Send and select On.
6. If you need to change any fax settings, select Menu, select Fax Send Settings, and select your
settings.
7. Press the
B&W button.
Your document is scanned and stored until you overwrite or delete it.
You can store only one document at a time. Subsequent documents overwrite the existing document.
You can also delete a stored document from the Status Menu.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Sending a Stored Fax
You can store one black-and-white scanned document (up to 100 pages) and send it whenever
necessary.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the
home button, if necessary.
289
3. Select Fax.
4. Select Menu.
5. Select Store Fax Data and select On.
6. If you need to change any fax settings, select Menu, select Fax Send Settings, and select your
settings.
7. Press the
B&W button.
Your document is scanned, stored, and briefly previewed.
8. When you are ready to send the document, press the Status button.
You see a screen like this:
9. Select Job Monitor.
10. Select Communication Job.
11. Select the stored fax job you want to send.
290
12. Select Send/View and select Send.
You can store only one document at a time. Subsequent documents overwrite the existing document.
You can also delete a stored document from the Status Menu.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone
If you have connected a telephone to the EXT port on your product, you can send a fax by dialing the fax
number from the connected telephone. If the recipient's phone number and fax number are the same,
you can speak to the recipient before sending the fax.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the
home button, if necessary.
3. Dial the fax number from the connected telephone. Speak to the recipient if necessary.
4. Select Start Fax on the LCD screen.
5. Select Send.
Note: Your product now communicates with the recipient's fax machine. Do not hang up the
telephone.
6. When you hear a fax tone, press one of the
buttons to start sending the fax.
Note: If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in blackand-white.
7. Hang up the telephone.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
291
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows
You can send a fax from a printing program in Windows. You can fax up to 100 pages at a time,
including a cover sheet.
1. Open the file you want to fax and select the print command.
You see a window like this:
2. Select your product with the FAX option as the printer.
3. To change the Paper Size, Orientation, Color, Image Quality, or Character Density settings, click the
Preferences or Properties button.
Note: If you see a Setup, Printer, or Options button, click it. Then click Preferences or Properties
on the next screen. For more information about selecting fax print settings, click Help.
4. Select the Page Range as necessary. (Leave the Number of copies set to 1.)
5. Click Print or OK.
292
If you’re faxing for the first time, you see a window like this one:
6. Enter your sender information so that recipients can identify the origin of the fax. Then click OK to
save the sender information.
293
You see a window like this:
7. Enter the recipient's name and fax number or select a recipient from the phonebook, then click Next.
Note: For detailed instructions on using the Epson FAX Utility, click Help.
8. Select a cover sheet and enter a subject and message, then click Next.
9. Click Send to transmit your fax.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - OS X
You can send a fax from a OS X printing program using the FAX Utility. You can fax up to 100 pages at a
time, including a cover sheet.
1. Open the file you want to fax.
294
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. Select your product FAX option as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
5. Select the number of pages you are faxing as the Pages setting.
Note: Leave the Copies setting set to 1.
6. Select Recipient Settings from the pop-up menu.
295
You see this window:
7. Do one of the following to choose your recipient:
• Select a name or group from the Recipient List.
• Enter a name, company, and fax number and click the + button.
• Click the
icon and select a recipient from your address book.
8. Select Fax Settings from the pop-up menu.
296
You see this window:
9. Select the Color and Image Quality settings you want to use for your fax.
10. Click Fax.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Receiving Faxes
See these sections to receive faxes with your product.
Fax Reception
Receiving Faxes Automatically
Receiving Faxes Manually
Forwarding Received Faxes
Receiving a Fax by Polling
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen
Parent topic: Faxing
Fax Reception
Your product will automatically receive and print faxes when you set the Receive Mode to Auto.
If you connected a telephone to your product so you can use the same phone line for faxes and voice
calls, you can also set your product to receive faxes manually. This allows you to check for a fax tone
using the telephone and press a button on your product to receive the fax.
Make sure to load paper in your product and select your fax settings before receiving a fax.
297
Note: If you run out of paper during fax printing, load more paper and press the button indicated on your
product's LCD screen to continue.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Receiving Faxes Automatically
To receive faxes automatically, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto (the default setting for the
product).
To change the Receive Mode if necessary, select Setup > System Administration > Fax Settings >
Receive Settings > Receive Mode.
If an answering machine is connected, make sure the product's Rings to Answer setting is set higher
than the number of rings your answering machine is set to answer a call. For example, if the answering
machine is set to pick up on the fourth ring, set the product to pick up on the fifth ring or later.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Related references
Receive Settings - Fax
Related tasks
Receiving Faxes Manually
Receiving Faxes Manually
You can set up your product to receive faxes manually by setting the Receive Mode to Manual. This lets
you check for a fax tone on the connected telephone before receiving a fax.
1. To change the Receive Mode, select Setup > System Administration > Fax Settings > Receive
Settings > Receive Mode and select Manual.
2. When the connected telephone rings, answer the call.
3. If you hear a fax tone, select Start Fax on the LCD display.
4. Select Receive.
5. Press one of the
buttons to start receiving the fax.
6. Hang up the telephone.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Related references
Receive Settings - Fax
298
Related tasks
Receiving Faxes Automatically
Forwarding Received Faxes
You can forward received faxes to another fax machine, or convert the faxes into PDF documents and
forward them to a shared folder on the network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted
from the product's memory. Before using this feature, make sure the date and time are set correctly, the
forwarding destination is set up in the contact list, and the email server settings are configured.
Note: Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
299
4. Scroll down and select Fax Settings.
5. Select Output Settings.
6. Select Fax Output.
7. Select Settings.
8. Select Forward.
9. Select On.
Note: If you want to print the fax automatically before forwarding it, select Yes and Print.
10. Select the forwarding destination from the contact list.
Note: Select View to sort your contacts by the printer's features. You can select up to 5 forwarding
destinations.
11. When you are finished selecting your forwarding destinations, select Proceed.
12. Confirm the displayed forwarding destinations are correct and select Close.
13. Select Options When Forwarding Failed.
14. Select the option you want to occur when received faxes fail to be forwarded; print the faxes or save
them in the printer's inbox.
15. If you are forwarding to an email address, you can specify the subject email by selecting Email
Subject to Forward.
Note: If you are forwarding faxes to a shared folder on the network or an email address, you can test
if fax forwarding was set up correctly by sending a scanned image to the destination using the scan
to email or scan to network folder/ftp option. If you are forwarding faxes to a shared folder on the
network, you can set up FAX Utility to notify you whenever a new fax is received.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Related tasks
Selecting the Date and Time
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related topics
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
300
Receiving a Fax by Polling
You can use polling to receive a fax from another fax machine (such as a fax information service).
Note: You cannot use polling to receive a fax from a fax information service that uses audio guidance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Menu.
4. Select Polling Receive and select On.
5. Enter the fax number you expect to receive the fax from.
6. Press one of the
buttons to start receiving the fax.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen
You can save received faxes in your product's memory and view them on the LCD screen.
Note: To use this feature, you must first enable Save to Inbox from the Output Settings menu. The Inbox
can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access the Inbox, contact your administrator for
assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
301
2. Check the
icon on the LCD screen. It turns on if there are any unread or unprinted faxes in the
product's memory.
3. Select Fax.
4. Select Open Inbox. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
5. Select the fax you want to view.
You see the fax displayed on the screen.
6. Select Menu.
7. Select one of the printer/deleting options and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: Delete faxes after you print or view them to prevent the product's memory from filling up. When the
memory is full, you cannot receive or send faxes.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Checking Fax Status
You can use the Status button to check the status of current fax jobs, or faxes that have been received
or sent.
1. Press the Status button.
You see a screen like this:
2. Do one of the following:
• To check the status of currrent fax jobs, select Job Monitor, select Communication Job, and
select the fax job you want to check.
302
• To check the history of faxes that have been sent or received, select Job History, select Receive
Job or Send Job, and select the job you want to check.
• To check received faxes that have been saved in the product's memory, select Job Storage and
select Inbox.
Parent topic: Faxing
Printing Fax Reports
You can select from several fax reports to print whenever necessary. You can also have the fax log
printed automatically by turning on Fax Log Auto Print.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Menu, select Fax Report, and select the report you want to print.
Fax Report Options
Parent topic: Faxing
Fax Report Options
Select the fax report or list you want to print.
Fax Settings List
Print a list of the current fax communication settings.
Fax Log
View or print a report on recent fax transmissions.
303
Last Transmission
Print a report on the previous fax that was sent or received through polling.
Stored Fax Documents
Print a list of the fax jobs currently stored in the product's memory.
Protocol Trace
Print a detailed report for the previous sent or received fax.
Parent topic: Printing Fax Reports
304
Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product
Follow the instructions here to work with a USB flash drive inserted into your product.
Inserting a USB Flash Drive
Removing a USB Flash Drive
Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen
Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive
Inserting a USB Flash Drive
Insert your USB flash drive into the USB port on the front of the product.
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the compatibility of your device. Make sure the files on the device are
compatible with the product.
USB Device Photo File Specifications
Parent topic: Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product
Related tasks
Removing a USB Flash Drive
USB Device Photo File Specifications
You can use USB devices with your product containing files that meet these specifications.
File format
JPEG with the Exif version 2.3 standard
TIFF 6.0-compliant uncompressed images: RGB full-color or binary
(not CCITT-encoded)
Image size
80 × 80 pixels to 10200 × 10200 pixels
File size
Up to 2GB
Number of files
JPEG: Up to 9990
TIFF: Up to 999
PDF: Up to 999
Parent topic: Inserting a USB Flash Drive
305
Removing a USB Flash Drive
After you finish working with a USB flash drive, follow these steps to remove it.
1. If your product is connected to your computer using a USB cable, do one of the following:
• Windows: Open the My Computer, Computer, or Windows Explorer utility. Then right-click the
name of your flash drive (listed as a removable disk) and select Eject.
• OS X: Drag the removable disk icon for your flash drive from the desktop into the trash.
Caution: Do not remove a flash drive before completing the procedure above or you may lose data
from the flash drive.
2. Pull the flash drive out of the USB port on the front of the product.
Parent topic: Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product
Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen
See these sections to view and print photos or other files displayed on your product's LCD screen.
Printing JPEG Photos
Printing TIFF and PDF Files
Photo Adjustment Options - Device Mode
Print Setting Options - Device Mode
Parent topic: Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product
Printing JPEG Photos
You can select JPEG photos for printing as you view them on the LCD screen.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Memory Device.
3. Select JPEG.
306
You see a screen like this:
Note: If you have more than 999 JPEG images on your device, the images are divided into groups,
and you must first select the group you want to display.
4. Do one of the following to select your photos:
• To select individual photos, select the thumbnail image of the photo you want to print, then use the
numeric keypad on the control panel or press + or – on the LCD screen to select the number of
copies (up to 99). Press the left or right arrow buttons to scroll through and select additional
photos, or press the back button to return to the thumbnail image view and select another photo.
• To select all photos, select Options > Select Images > Select All Images.
5. To adjust a photo (adjustments modify only your printed copy, not the original file), select its
thumbnail image and select Adjustments. Make the necessary adjustments and press the back
button.
6. To change the print settings, select Settings and select the necessary settings. When you are
finished, press the back button.
7. When you are ready to print, press one of the
Note: To cancel printing, press the
buttons.
Stop button.
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen
Related references
Photo Adjustment Options - Device Mode
Print Setting Options - Device Mode
307
Printing TIFF and PDF Files
You can select and print TIFF or PDF files from a USB flash drive.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Memory Device.
3. Select TIFF or PDF.
You see a list of the available files.
4. Select the file you want to print.
You see information about the file.
5. Select Proceed.
6. Do the following as necessary:
• To print more than one copy, use the numeric keypad on the control panel or press + or – on the
LCD screen to select the number of copies (up to 99).
• To change the print settings, select Settings and select the necessary settings. When you are
finished, press the back button.
7. Select Proceed.
8. When you are ready to print, press one of the
Note: To cancel printing, press the
buttons.
Stop button.
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen
Related references
Print Setting Options - Device Mode
Photo Adjustment Options - Device Mode
Select the image adjustment options you want to use when viewing and printing photos displayed on the
LCD screen.
308
Photo
adjustment
settings
Available options
Description
Fix Photo
On
Automatically adjusts the brightness, contrast, and saturation
of the photo based on the Advanced > Scene Detection
setting that is selected
Off
Turns off automatic adjustments; see Note below
P.I.M.
Uses your camera's PRINT Image Matching or Exif Print
adjustments
Off - This Image
Automatically fixes the red-eye effect in photos
Fix Red-Eye
On - This Image
Off - All Image
On - All Image
Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include faces.
For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo includes a
face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to retain the
special color effects.
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen
Print Setting Options - Device Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing from a USB flash drive.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.
Print settings
Available options
Description
Paper Source
Various paper size
and type settings
Indicates the source that contains the paper size and type
you want to print on
Quality
Standard
Provides good quality for most prints
Best
Provides the highest quality for special prints
Various date formats
Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the
format you select
Date
309
Print settings
Available options
Description
Fit Frame
On
Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo
layout
Off
Turns off automatic cropping
On
Prints at normal speed
Off
Slows down printing to improve print quality
On
Select On to print PDF files double-sided. You can also
select the Binding Margin and Dry Time if necessary.
Bidirectional
2-Sided
Off
Print Order
Last Page on Top
Select the order for printing multi-page TIFF or PDF files
First Page on Top
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen
Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive
You can transfer files to and from a USB flash drive inserted into the USB port on the front of your
product.
Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer
Transferring Files from a USB Flash Drive to Your Computer
Parent topic: Using USB Flash Drives With Your Product
Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer
Before you transfer files from a computer to a USB flash drive inserted into the USB port on the front of
your product, you may need to set up your product's file sharing settings.
Caution: Remove the flash drive before you change this setting or you may lose data from the flash
drive.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
310
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select Printer Settings.
5. Select Memory Device Interface.
You see a screen like this:
6. Make sure Memory Device is set to Enable.
7. Select File Sharing.
8. Select the way your computer is connected to the product: either USB or Wi-Fi/Network.
Parent topic: Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive
Related tasks
Removing a USB Flash Drive
Transferring Files from a USB Flash Drive to Your Computer
You can transfer files to and from a USB flash drive inserted into the USB port on the front of your
product and a computer connected to your product.
Note: Do not transfer files to and from a flash drive while you are printing from the flash drive.
1. Make sure your product is connected to a computer.
2. Insert a flash drive into the USB port on the front of your product.
3. Do one of the following to access your flash drive files from your computer:
• Windows: Select the Computer or My Computer utility, then select the removable disk icon.
• OS X with a USB connection: Look for the removable disk icon on your desktop, then select it.
311
• OS X with a network connection: Select the hard drive icon on your desktop or select Computer
from the Go menu, select your product in the SHARED section of the sidebar (you may need to
widen the sidebar to see the name), and select the USBSTORAGE icon.
4. Select the folder that contains your files.
5. Drag the files you want to transfer to the desired folder on your computer or on your flash drive.
Note: Your product's LCD screen does not update to display new information about your flash drive after
you copy files to it or delete files from it. Remove and insert the flash drive to update the information.
Parent topic: Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive
Related tasks
Inserting a USB Flash Drive
312
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system during print head cleaning. When an
ink cartridge is expended or the maintenance box is at the end of its service life, you need to replace it.
You may also need to replace a cartridge that is more than six months old if your printouts do not look
their best, even after cleaning and aligning the print head.
Note: Please dispose of your used Epson branded ink cartridges and maintenance boxes responsibly
and in accordance with local requirements. If you would like to return your used ink cartridges and
maintenance boxes to Epson for proper disposal, please go to epson.com/recycle for more information.
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Your printer and its software will let you know when an ink cartridge is low or expended, or when the
maintenance box needs to be replaced.
Note: When using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product,
you can check ink cartridge and maintenance box status by using the printer buttons or the utilities
included with the standard Epson printer software. To download the standard Epson printer software, go
to epson.com/support/wf8590.
Checking Cartridge Status on the LCD Screen
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with Windows
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with OS X
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Checking Cartridge Status on the LCD Screen
When one of your cartridges is low, you see the
light flashes.
313
icon on the LCD screen and the orange Status
When a cartridge is expended, you see the
icon and the orange Status light stays on.
You can use the Status button check the status of the cartridges and maintenance box.
1. Press the Status button.
2. Select Printer Information.
You see a screen like this:
The ink and maintenance box levels are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Note: The displayed ink and maintenance box levels are approximate.
3. For more information, select the ink cartridge images at the bottom of the screen.
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with Windows
A low ink reminder appears if you try to print when ink is low, and you can check your cartridge or
maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Windows computer.
1. To check your status, access the Windows Desktop, double-click the product icon in the Windows
taskbar, and click Details.
314
You see this window:
2. Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or any ink cartridge as indicated on the screen.
Note: If any of the cartridges installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model,
or improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate cartridge status.
3. To disable the low ink reminder, right-click the product icon in the Windows taskbar and select
Monitoring Preferences.
315
You see this window:
4. Deselect the See Low Ink Reminder alerts checkbox at the bottom of the screen.
5. To disable promotional offers, deselect the Display Epson Offers checkbox.
6. Click OK.
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
316
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status with OS X
You can check the status of your ink cartridges and maintenance box using a utility on your Mac.
1. Do one of the following:
• OS X 10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
• OS X 10.5: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax,
select your product, and select Open Print Queue. Select Utility.
2. Select EPSON Status Monitor.
317
You see this window:
3. Do the following as necessary:
• You can update the ink cartridge and maintenance box status by clicking Update.
• Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or any ink cartridge as indicated on the screen.
Note: If any of the cartridges installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model,
or improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate cartridge status.
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
318
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at Epson Supplies Central at
epson.com/ink3 (U.S. sales) or epson.ca (Canadian sales). You can also purchase supplies from an
Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766).
Note: This product uses only genuine Epson-brand cartridges. Other brands of ink cartridges and ink
supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function properly.
The cartridges included with the printer are designed for printer setup and not for resale. After some ink
is used for priming, the rest is available for printing. Yields vary considerably based on images printed,
print settings, paper type, frequency of use, and temperature. For print quality, a variable amount of ink
remains in the cartridge after the "replace cartridge" indicator comes on.
Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Use these part numbers when you order or purchase a new maintenance box or ink cartridges.
Maintenance box part number: T671200
Note: For best printing results, use up a cartridge within 6 months after installing it.
Ink color
Part number
Standard-capacity
High-capacity
Extra High-capacity
Black
748
748XL
748XXL
Cyan
748
748XL
748XXL
Magenta
748
748XL
748XXL
Yellow
748
748XL
748XXL
Parent topic: Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
319
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Make sure you have your replacement cartridges handy before you begin. You must install new
cartridges immediately after removing the old ones.
Caution: Leave your old cartridges in the printer until you are ready to replace them to prevent the print
head nozzles from drying out. Do not open ink cartridge packages until you are ready to install the ink.
Cartridges are vacuum packed to maintain reliability.
1. Turn on your product.
2. If an ink cartridge is low or expended, a message appears on your product and on your computer
screen. Note which cartridges need to be replaced.
3. Open the front cover.
4. Push in the ink cartridge that you want to replace.
320
The ink cartridge pops out slightly.
5. Pull the ink cartridge out of the slot.
Note: Dispose of used cartridges carefully. Do not take the used cartridge apart or try to refill it.
Warning: If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes,
flush them immediately with water. If ink gets into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children.
6. Remove the cartridge from the package.
321
Caution: Do not touch the green chip on the cartridge. Install the new cartridge immediately after
removing the old one; if you do not, the print head may dry out and be unable to print.
7. Gently shake the ink cartridge horizontally for about five seconds as shown.
Caution: Do not remove any labels or seals, or ink will leak.
8. Insert the new cartridge into the holder and push it in until it clicks into place.
9. If the Check option is displayed on the LCD screen, select it to make sure the cartridges are installed
correctly.
Caution: If you see a message that an ink cartridge is installed incorrectly, press in the ink cartridge
until it clicks into place.
10. When you are finished, close the front cover.
The product starts priming the ink and returns to its previous state when finished.
Note: Do not turn off the printer during ink replacement.
322
Caution: If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and
store it in the same environment as the printer. The valve in the ink supply port is designed to contain
any excess ink, but do not touch the ink supply port or surrounding area. Always store ink cartridges with
the label facing up; do not store cartridges upside-down.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Related concepts
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
When a color ink cartridge is expended, you can temporarily continue printing from your computer using
black ink. Replace the expended color cartridge as soon as possible for future printing.
Note: You cannot print with expended color ink cartridges using your product's control panel.
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Windows
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - OS X
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Windows
If you see a message during printing telling you that you can temporarily print in black ink with an
expended color cartridge, you can cancel your print job and select settings to print on plain paper or on
an envelope.
Note: To use this feature, Epson Status Monitor must be enabled.
1. Click Cancel or Cancel Print to cancel your print job.
Note: If the message screen appears on another computer on a network, you may need to cancel
the print job using the product control panel.
2. Load plain paper or an envelope in your product.
3. Access the print settings in your print application.
4. Click the Main tab.
5. Select Plain Paper/Bright White Paper or Envelope as the paper type setting.
323
6. Select the Black/Grayscale checkbox.
7. Click OK.
8. Print your document.
Epson Status Monitor 3 displays a print message.
9. Click Print in Black to print your document.
Parent topic: Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - OS X
If printing stops, you can cancel your print job and select settings to temporarily print with only black ink
on plain paper or on an envelope.
1. Click the printer icon in the Dock.
2. If you see a message telling you that you can temporarily print with only black ink, click the Delete
icon to cancel your print job. (OS X 10.8/10.9: Click the
message is displayed, click OK.)
icon to cancel your print job. If an error
Note: If the message screen appears on another computer on a network, you may need to cancel
the print job using the product control panel.
3. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences.
4. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
5. Select Driver or Options.
324
You see a screen like this:
6. Select On as the Permit temporary black printing setting.
7. Click OK.
8. Close the utility window.
9. Load plain paper or an envelope in your product.
10. Access the print settings in your print application.
11. Select Print Settings from the pop-up menu.
12. Select Plain Paper/Bright White Paper or Envelope as the paper type setting.
13. Select the Grayscale option.
14. Click Print to print your document.
Parent topic: Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
325
Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows
The following window appears when black ink runs low and there is more color ink.
Note: The window appears only when you have selected Plain Paper/Bright White Paper as the paper
type setting, and depends on other selected print settings. To use this feature, Epson Status Monitor
must be enabled.
• Click Yes to use a mixture of color inks to create black, or No to continue using the remaining black ink
for the document you are printing.
• Click Disable this feature to continue using the remaining black ink.
Note: If you disable this feature, it remains disabled until you install a new black ink cartridge.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Make sure you have a new maintenance box before you begin.
Caution: Do not reuse a maintenance box that has been removed and left uninstalled for more than a
week. Keep the maintenance box away from direct sunlight.
1. Make sure the product is not printing.
326
2. Remove the new maintenance box from its package.
Caution: Do not touch the green chip on the maintenance box. Do not remove the film on the box, or
ink may leak.
3. Open the rear cover 1 (D1).
4. Grasp the maintenance box as shown and pull it out of its holder.
Note: Do not tilt the used maintenance box or take it apart.
327
Warning: If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes,
flush them immediately with water. If ink gets into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
Keep the maintenance box out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
5. Place the used maintenance box in the plastic bag that came with the new maintenance box. Seal
the bag and dispose of it carefully.
6. Insert the new maintenance box into the holder and push it all the way in.
7. Close the rear cover 1 (D1).
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Related concepts
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
328
Adjusting Print Quality
If your print quality declines, you may need to run a utility to clean or align the print head.
Note: When using the PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product, you can clean and align the
print head and run a nozzle check by using the printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard
Epson printer software. To download the standard Epson printer software, go to
epson.com/support/wf8590.
If running these utilities does not solve the problem, you may need to replace the ink cartridges.
Print Head Maintenance
Print Head Alignment
Cleaning the Paper Guide
Print Head Maintenance
If your printouts become too light, or you see dark or light bands across them, you may need to clean the
print head nozzles. Cleaning uses ink, so clean the nozzles only if print quality declines.
You can check for clogged nozzles before you clean them so you don’t clean them unnecessarily.
Note: You cannot clean the print head if an ink cartridge is expended, and may not be able to clean it
when a cartridge is low. You must replace the cartridge first.
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Related topics
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Print Head Nozzle Check
You can print a nozzle check pattern to check for clogged nozzles.
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance
329
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
You can check the print head nozzles using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the
home button, if necessary.
4. Select Setup.
5. Select Maintenance.
You see a screen like this:
6. Select Print Head Nozzle Check.
You see a screen like this:
7. Press the
Color button.
330
The nozzle pattern prints.
8. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
9. Do one of the following:
• If there are no gaps, select Done.
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select Clean the Print Head and continue.
10. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head, check the nozzles, and repeat the
process as necessary.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times, turn off the product, if
possible, and wait at least 6 hours. Then try cleaning the print head again. If quality still does not
improve, one of the ink cartridges may be old or damaged and needs to be replaced.
Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Related topics
Loading Paper
331
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
You can check the print head nozzles using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer.
1. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
2. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the product icon in the Windows taskbar.
• OS X 10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
• OS X 10.5: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax,
select your product, and select Open Print Queue. Select Utility.
3. Select Nozzle Check.
You see a window like this:
332
4. Click Print.
5. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
6. If there are no gaps, click Finish.
If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, clean the print head.
Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Related topics
Loading Paper
Print Head Cleaning
If print quality has declined and the nozzle check pattern indicates clogged nozzles, you can clean the
print head.
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
333
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
You can clean the print head using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the
home button, if necessary.
4. Select Setup.
5. Select Maintenance.
You see a screen like this:
6. Select Print Head Cleaning.
You see a screen like this:
7. Press the
Color button to clean the print head.
334
When the cleaning cycle is finished, you see a message on the screen.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
8. Select Print Nozzle Check Pattern.
9. Press the
Color button to confirm that the print head is clean.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times, wait at least 6 hours without
printing or longer if printing. Then try cleaning the print head again. If quality still does not improve, one
of the ink cartridges may be old or damaged and needs to be replaced.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related tasks
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Related topics
Loading Paper
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
You can clean the print head using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer.
1. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
2. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the product icon in the Windows taskbar.
• OS X 10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
• OS X 10.5: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax,
select your product, and select Open Print Queue. Select Utility.
3. Select Head Cleaning.
335
You see a window like this:
4. Click Start to begin the cleaning cycle.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
5. When the cleaning cycle is finished, you can check to see if the nozzles are clean; click Print Nozzle
Check Pattern and click Print.
6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
336
Print head needs cleaning
• If there are no gaps, click Finish.
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, click Clean to clean the print head again.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times, wait at least 6 hours without
printing or longer if printing. Then try cleaning the print head again. If quality still does not improve, one
of the ink cartridges may be old or damaged and needs to be replaced.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related tasks
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Related topics
Loading Paper
Print Head Alignment
If your printouts become grainy or blurry, you notice misalignment of vertical lines, or you see dark or
light horizontal bands, you may need to align the print head.
Note: Banding may also occur if your print head nozzles need cleaning.
Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Aligning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
You can align the print head using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the
home button, if necessary.
337
4. Select Setup.
5. Select Maintenance.
You see a screen like this:
6. Select Print Head Alignment.
7. Do one of the following:
• If vertical lines are misaligned, select Ruled Line Alignment.
• If your printouts look blurry, select Vertical Alignment.
• If you see horizontal bands at regular intervals, select Horizontal Alignment.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to print an alignment sheet.
Note: Do not cancel printing while you are printing head alignment patterns.
9. Check the printed patterns on the alignment sheet and do one of the following:
• If you printed a ruled line alignment sheet, select the number representing the pattern with the
least misaligned vertical line.
338
• If you printed a vertical alignment sheet, select the number representing the most solid printed
pattern for each set on the LCD screen.
• If you printed a horizontal alignment sheet, select the number representing the pattern with the
least amount of separation or overlap on the LCD screen.
Parent topic: Print Head Alignment
Related topics
Loading Paper
Aligning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
You can align the print head using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer.
1. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
2. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the product icon in the Windows taskbar.
• OS X 10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
• OS X 10.5: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax,
select your product, and select Open Print Queue. Select Utility.
3. Select Print Head Alignment.
339
4. Click Next, then click Print to print an alignment sheet.
Note: Do not cancel printing while you are printing a head alignment pattern.
You see a window like this:
5. Check the printed pattern and follow the instructions on the screen to choose the number
representing the best printed pattern for each set.
Vertical alignment
340
Horizontal alignment
• After choosing each pattern number, click Next.
• If no patterns are aligned in one or more of the sets, choose the closest one in each set and click
Realignment. Then print another alignment sheet and check it.
Note: Click Skip (where available) if you want to skip a particular alignment sheet.
6. When you are done, click Finish.
Parent topic: Print Head Alignment
Related topics
Loading Paper
Cleaning the Paper Guide
If you see ink on the back of a printout, you can clean the paper guide rollers to remove any excess ink. If
paper does not feed correctly from the rear paper feed slot, you can use a cleaning sheet to clean the
rollers.
1. Do one of the following:
• If printouts are smeared or scuffed, load plain paper in the paper source that you want to clean in
this size: A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm]).
• If paper does not feed correctly from the rear paper feed slot, load the cleaning sheet that comes
with genuine Epson paper in the rear paper feed slot.
2. Press the
home button, if necessary.
3. Select Setup.
4. Select Maintenance.
341
You see a screen like this:
5. Scroll down and select Paper Guide Cleaning.
6. Select the paper source you want to clean.
7. Press the
Color button.
8. If you are cleaning the paper guides, repeat as necessary until the paper comes out clean. If you are
using a cleaning sheet, repeat these steps up to 3 times.
Note: If the paper is not clean after cleaning several times, try cleaning the other paper sources.
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Related topics
Loading Paper
342
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
See these sections if you need to clean or transport your product.
Cleaning Your Product
Transporting Your Product
Cleaning Your Product
To keep your product working at its best, you should clean it several times a year.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Disconnect any connected cables.
4. Remove all the paper from the product.
343
5. Clean the scanner glass and the glass area on the left with a soft, lint-free cloth (microfiber is
recommended) moistened with a little glass cleaner.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with
any force.
Note: If lines appear on the printout or in scanned images, carefully clean the scanner glass on the
left.
344
6. Raise the lever and open the ADF cover (F).
7. Use a soft, dry, lint-free cloth (microfiber is recommended) to clean the rollers and the interior of the
ADF.
8. Clean the outer case and control panel with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers.
345
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Transporting Your Product
If you need to store your product or transport it, prepare it for transportation as described here.
Caution: During transportation and storage, follow these guidelines:
• Use two or more people to lift the product.
• When lifting the product, hold it as shown here. Holding other areas may cause the product to fall or
cause you to pinch your fingers when placing the product down.
• Leave the maintenance box installed; otherwise ink may leak.
• When placing the product on the optional cabinet, lock the casters on the cabinet first.
• Avoid tilting the product, placing it vertically, or turning it upside down; otherwise ink may leak.
• Leave the ink cartridges installed. Removing the cartridges can dry out the print head and may prevent
the product from printing.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Unplug the power cord.
346
3. Disconnect any connected cables.
4. Remove all the paper from the product.
5. Make sure there are no originals on the product.
6. Close the paper support and output tray.
7. If you transporting the product a short distance, remove the optional cabinet and paper cassettes (if
they are installed) before lifting the product.
Note: If the optional cabinet is installed, you can use the casters on the cabinet to roll the product
instead of lifting it. Remove the cabinet stands and unlock the casters before moving the product. Do
not roll the product over uneven or rough surfaces to avoid harsh impacts to the product.
8. If you are transporting the product over a long distance, place the product in its original packing
materials, if possible, or use equivalent materials with cushioning around the product. Make sure the
box adequately protects the product control panel.
Keep the product level during transportation. If print quality has declined when you print again, clean and
align the print head.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Alignment
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
347
Solving Problems
Check these sections for solutions to problems you may have using your product.
Checking for Software Updates
Product Status Messages
Status Menu Error Codes
Running a Product Check
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
Solving Setup Problems
Solving Network Problems
Solving Copying Problems
Solving Paper Problems
Solving PostScript Printing Problems
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Solving Print Quality Problems
Solving Scanning Problems
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Solving Faxing Problems
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help
Checking for Software Updates
Periodically, it's a good idea to check Epson's support website for free updates to your product software.
Visit the driver download site at (U.S. downloads or Canadian downloads).
• Windows: Your printer software automatically checks for updates. You can also manually update the
software by selecting Software Update here:
• Accessing the Windows Desktop and right-clicking the product icon in the Windows taskbar
• On the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window
348
You can also update the software by selecting EPSON Software Updater in the EPSON or EPSON
Software program group, accessible by the Start button, or on the Start or Apps screens, depending
on your version of Windows.
• OS X: You can manually update the software by opening the Applications > Epson Software folder
and selecting EPSON Software Updater.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Status Messages
You can often diagnose problems with your product by checking the messages on its LCD screen. You
can also check for errors by pressing the Status button to display the Status Menu.
Note: If the screen is dark, press the screen to wake the product from sleep mode.
LCD screen message
Condition/solution
Printer error. Turn the power off and
on again.
Turn the product off and then back on again. If the error
continues, check for and remove any paper jams or protective
materials from the product. If the error is still displayed, contact
Epson for support.
Too many paper cassette units are
installed. Turn the power off and
uninstall the extra units.
You can install up to three optional paper cassette units.
Remove any extra units.
Cannot print because XX is out of
order. You can print from another
paper source.
Turn the product off and then back on again. Reinsert the
indicated paper cassette.
Maintenance rollers on XX are
nearing the end of their service life.
The maintenance rollers need to be replaced periodically for
optimal performance. (Paper may not feed correctly from the
paper cassette when the maintenance roller is near the end of its
service life.)
Maintenance rollers on XX are at the Contact your dealer to replace the maintenance rollers. Reset
end of their service life.
the maintenance roller counter and select the paper cassette for
which you replaced the maintenance rollers.
You need to replace the following ink Replace the ink cartridge indicated on the LCD screen.
cartridge(s).
349
LCD screen message
Condition/solution
Communication error
Make sure the computer is connected to your product and the
Epson Scan and Document Capture Pro software is installed
correctly.
No dial tone detected.
Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the
phone line works. If you connected the product to a PBX (Private
Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal Adapter, change the
Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off
the Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone
Detection setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of
a fax number.)
Combination of IP address and
subnet mask is invalid.
There is a problem with the network connection to your product.
Recovery mode
An error has occurred during firmware updating. Connect your
product using a USB cable and try downloading the Firmware
Update from the Epson support site. If you still need help,
contact Epson for support.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related references
Where to Get Help
Related tasks
Checking for Software Updates
Selecting the Line Type
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Status Menu Error Codes
If a job does not complete successfully, you can check the error code. Press the Status button, then
select Job History and locate the incomplete job. Select the job to display the error code and additional
information.
350
Code
Condition/solution
001
The product was turned off by a power failure.
101
Memory is full. Reduce the size of the print job.
102
Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Clear fonts and macros
from the product's memory using the Clear Font and Macro option from the Setup menu,
reduce the size of the print job, or print one copy at a time.
103
Print quality was decreased due to a lack of available memory. If the quality of the printout
is unacceptable, try simplifying the page by reducing the number of graphics or the
number and size of the fonts.
104
Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Clear fonts and macros
from the product's memory using the Clear Font and Macro option from the Setup menu
or reduce the data size of the print job.
106
Cannot print from the computer due to access control settings. Contact your printer
administrator.
107
User authentication failed and the job has been canceled. Contact your printer
administrator.
108
Confidential job data was deleted when the product was turned off.
109
The received fax was already deleted.
110
The job was printed 1-sided because the loaded paper does not support 2-sided printing.
111
Available memory is running low. Reduce the size of the print job.
201
The product's memory is full. You can send pages individually, or print received faxes and
delete them to free up memory space.
202
The line was disconnected by the recipient's fax machine. Wait a moment, then try again.
203
The product cannot detect a dial tone.
Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the phone line works. If you
connected the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal
Adapter, change the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the
Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the
product to drop the first digit of a fax number.)
204
The recipient's fax machine is busy. Wait a moment, then try again.
205
The recipient's fax machine does not answer. Wait a moment, then try again.
351
Code
Condition/solution
206
The phone cable is incorrectly connected to the product's LINE and EXT ports. Connect
the phone cable correctly.
207
The phone cable is not connected. Connect the phone cable.
208
The fax could not be sent to some of the specified recipients.
Print a fax log to check which recipients failed to receive the fax. If the Save Failure Data
setting is turned on, you can resend a fax from Job Monitor in the Status Menu.
301
401
302
There is not enough storage space available to save the data in the external memory
device. Clear space on the device or use a different device.
The external memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection.
402
303
No folder is available for saving the scanned file. Create a folder or use a different
memory device.
304
The external memory device has been removed. Reinsert the device.
404
305
405
An error occurred while saving data to an external memory device. Reinsert the memory
device or use a different device.
306
The product's memory is full. Wait until current jobs are finished processing.
311
A DNS error has occurred. Check the DNS settings for the server, computer, or access
point. DNS settings for the server can be checked from the DNS Server option in the
Setup menu.
321
411
421
312
An authentication error has occurred. Check the Server Settings from the Setup menu.
412
313
413
314
A communication error has occurred. Check the Server Settings or network connection by
running a connection check. If you selected Off as the authentication method, make sure
to select None for the email server authentication method.
The data size exceeds the maximum size for the attached files. Increase the Attached
File Max Size setting in the scan settings or lower the file size of the scanned image.
352
Code
Condition/solution
315
The memory is full. Retry after other ongoing jobs have finished.
327
322
An authentication error occurred. Check the Location settings.
323
A communication error has occurred. Check the Location settings or the network
connection.
324
A file with the same name already exists in the specified folder. Delete the duplicate file or
change the file name prefix in File Settings.
325
There is not enough storage space available in the specified folder. Increase the storage
space in the specified folder, delete unnecessary files, or lower the file size of the
scanned image.
328
The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist. Check the Location
settings.
331
A communication error occurred while acquiring the destination list. Make sure the
product is connected to the network correctly.
332
There is not enough space available for saving the scanned files in the specified folder.
Delete unnecessary files from the specified folder.
333
The destination could not be found because the destination information was uploaded to
the server before sending the scanned data. Select the destination again.
334
An error occurred while sending the scanned data.
341
A communication error has occurred. Make sure the product is connected to the computer
or network correctly. Make sure you have installed Document Capture Pro or Document
Capture. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your firewall or
security software.
422
An authentication error has occurred. Make sure the settings are correct for the folder
selected in the Where to Forward setting in the Setup menu.
423
A communication error has occurred. It is also possible that a file with the same name is
open or the file is a read-only file.
Check the network connection, make sure the settings are correct for the folder selected
in the Where to Forward setting in the Setup menu, close the duplicate file, or disable
read-only protection.
353
Code
Condition/solution
425
There is not enough storage space available in the forwarding destination folder. Increase
the storage space in the destination folder.
428
The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist. Make sure the settings are
correct for the folder selected in the Where to Forward setting in the Setup menu.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related tasks
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen
Selecting the Line Type
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control)
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Related topics
Sending Faxes
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Running a Product Check
Running a product check helps you determine if your product is operating properly.
1. Disconnect any interface cables connected to your product.
2. Load plain paper in the product.
3. Press the
home button, if necessary.
4. Select Setup.
5. Select Maintenance.
354
You see a screen like this:
6. Select Print Head Nozzle Check.
You see a screen like this:
7. Press the
Color button.
The nozzle pattern prints.
8. Do one of the following, depending on the results of the product check:
• If the page prints and the nozzle check pattern is complete, the product is operating properly. Any
operation problem you may have could be caused by your computer, cable, software, or selected
settings. Check the other solutions in this book or try uninstalling and reinstalling your printer
software.
• If the page prints but the nozzle check pattern has gaps, clean or align the print head.
• If the page does not print, the product may have a problem. Check the other solutions in this
manual. If they do not work, contact Epson.
355
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Alignment
When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Related references
Where to Get Help
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
If you have a problem with settings on the product control panel, you can reset them to their factory
defaults. You can choose which settings to reset or reset them all.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the
home button, if necessary.
2. Select Setup.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Scroll down and select Restore Default Settings.
You see a screen like this:
5. Select one of these options:
• Wi-Fi/Network Settings: Resets all network settings.
356
• Copy Settings: Resets all settings for copying.
• Scan Settings: Resets all settings for scanning.
• Fax Settings: Resets all settings for faxing.
• Clear All Data and Settings: Resets all control panel settings including the contacts list.
You see a confirmation screen.
6. Select Yes to reset the selected settings. (Select No if you want to cancel the operation.)
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solving Setup Problems
Check these sections if you have problems while setting up your product.
Product Does Not Turn On or Off
Noise After Ink Installation
Software Installation Problems
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Does Not Turn On or Off
If you cannot turn the product on or off, try these solutions:
• If you cannot turn on your product, make sure the power cord is securely connected and hold down
the power button a little longer.
• If you cannot turn off your product, hold the power button down a little longer. If you still cannot turn off
your product, unplug the power cord. To prevent the print head from drying out, plug the power cord
back in, then turn your product on and off again using the power button.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Noise After Ink Installation
If you hear noises from your product after installing ink, check the following:
• The first time you install the ink cartridge, the product must prime its print head. Wait until priming
finishes before you turn off the product, or it may prime improperly and use excess ink the next time
you turn it on.
• If the product's print head stops moving or making noise, and the charging process has not finished
after approximately 5 minutes, turn off your product. Turn it back on and check to see if charging is still
in progress. If it is still in progress, contact Epson for help.
357
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Software Installation Problems
If you have problems while installing your product software, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any necessary cables are securely connected at both ends. If
you still have problems installing software, disconnect the cable and carefully follow the instructions on
the Start Here sheet. Also make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system.
• Close any other programs, including screen savers and virus protection software, and install your
product software again.
• In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the correct port is shown in
the printer properties.
• If you see any error message or your software does not install correctly in Windows, you may not have
software installation privileges. Contact your System Administrator.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Related concepts
When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Related references
Windows System Requirements
OS X System Requirements
Solving Network Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems setting up or using your product on a network.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is
not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
Product Does Not Appear in OS X Printer Window
Cannot Print Over a Network
Cannot Scan Over a Network
Parent topic: Solving Problems
358
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
If your product has trouble finding or connecting to a wireless router or access point, try these solutions:
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD is not lit or does not appear, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the
product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• Make sure to place your product within contact range of your 2.4GHz router or access point. Avoid
placing your product near a microwave oven, 2.4 GHz cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a
filing cabinet.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. See your router documentation for instructions.
• Verify that your router or access point is operating correctly by connecting to it from your computer or
another device.
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
• Check to see if access restrictions, such as MAC address filtering, are set on the router or access
point. If access restrictions are set, add your product's MAC address to your router's address list. To
obtain your product's MAC address, print a network status sheet. Then follow the instructions in your
router or access point documentation to add the address to the list.
• If your router or access point does not broadcast its network name (SSID), follow the instructions that
came with your product to enter your wireless network name manually.
• Make sure you are connected to a 2.4 GHz band and not 5 GHz.
• If your router or access point has security enabled, determine the kind of security it is using and any
required password or passphrase for connection. Then make sure to enter the exact WEP key or WPA
passphrase correctly.
• Check if your computer is restricting the available wireless channels. If so, verify that your wireless
access point is using one of the usable channels and change to a usable channel, if necessary.
• If you are using a Wi-Fi Direct connection that suddenly disconnects, the Wi-Fi direct password on
your device may have been changed. If necessary, delete the existing DIRECT-xxxxxxxx connection
settings from your device and enter a new password. See your device documentation for instructions.
• If you connected your product to a Windows computer using Wi-Fi Direct and it automatically selected
Access Point Mode, you may have trouble accessing a low-priority Internet connection. Check the
network connection or adapter settings in the Windows Control Panel and set the Internet metric
setting to 100 for your version of the Internet Protocol.
359
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Related tasks
Selecting Wireless Network Settings From the Control Panel
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
If EpsonNet Setup cannot find your product on a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your network. Verify connection using your
product control panel.
• Check if your network name (SSID) contains non-ASCII characters. Your product cannot display nonASCII characters.
• Make sure your product is not connected to a guest network.
• If necessary, reinstall your product software and try running EpsonNet Setup again:
1. Reset your product's network settings to their factory defaults.
2. Windows only: uninstall your product software.
3. Initialize your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
initialize your router, so note the next step before initializing it.
4. Download your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here
sheet.
• If you have replaced your router, reinstall your product software to connect to the new router.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. See your router documentation for instructions.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
360
Related concepts
When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Product Does Not Appear in OS X Printer Window
If your product does not appear in the OS X printer window, try these solutions:
• Turn your product off, wait 30 seconds, then turn it back on again.
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control panel
within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• If you are connecting the product wirelessly via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi-Fi icon does not appear lit
on your LCD screen, make sure your product software was installed correctly. If necessary, reinstall
your software.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. See your router documentation for instructions.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Cannot Print Over a Network
If you cannot print over a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure that your product is turned on.
• Make sure you install your product's network software as described in your product documentation.
• Print a network status sheet and verify that the network settings are correct. If the network status is
Disconnected, check any cable connections and turn your product off and then on again.
• If you are using TCP/IP, make sure the product's IP address is set correctly for your network. If your
network does not assign IP addresses using DHCP, set the IP address manually.
• Make sure your computer and product are both using the same wireless network.
361
• If network printing is slow, print a network status sheet and check the signal strength. If it is poor, place
your product closer to your router or access point. Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven,
2.4 GHz cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. See your router documentation for instructions.
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing printing from a device over the network. See your router or access point documentation for
instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control panel
within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• Check your wired LAN router or access point to see if the LED for the port to which your product is
connected is on or flashing. If the link LED is off, try the following:
• Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your product and to your router, access
point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting your product to a different port or a different router, access point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting with a different Ethernet cable.
• Try printing to your product from another computer on the network.
• If you are connecting the product via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi-Fi icon does not appear lit on the
LCD, make sure your product software was installed correctly. If necessary, reinstall your software.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Related tasks
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
362
Cannot Scan Over a Network
If you cannot start Epson Scan for scanning over a network, try these solutions:
• If you cannot scan from your product control panel, make sure you restarted your computer after
installing the product software. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your
firewall or security software.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5
GHz) mode. See your router documentation for instructions.
• If you are scanning a large original at a high resolution, a network communication error may occur. Try
scanning again at a lower resolution.
• If network communication was interrupted while starting Epson Scan, exit Epson Scan, wait a few
seconds, and restart it. If Epson Scan cannot restart, turn off your product, turn it back on, and try
restarting Epson Scan again.
• Check the connection setting and test the connection using Epson Scan Settings:
Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select EPSON Scan Settings. Make sure the
Connection setting is set to Network, then click the Test button.
Windows (other versions): Click
or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > EPSON
Scan > EPSON Scan Settings. Make sure the Connection setting is set to Network, then click the
Test button.
OS X: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click EPSON Scan Settings. Make
sure the Connection setting is set to Network, then click the Test button.
• Make sure the option selected as the Timeout Setting in the Epson Scan Settings program is long
enough to complete scanning over a network.
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
Note: With OS X, in addition to scanning with Image Capture, you can download and install Epson Scan
scanning software. Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for
enhancing scanned images, and provides an interface for TWAIN-compliant OCR scanning software. To
download Epson Scan, visit Epson's driver download site (U.S. downloads or Canadian downloads).
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related tasks
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
363
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan Icon
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Solving Copying Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems copying with your product.
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies
If your product makes a noise, but nothing copies, try these solutions:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• If the nozzle check page does not print, but the product's power is on, make sure your product
software is installed correctly.
• Make sure your product is level (not tilted).
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While
Your product is performing routine maintenance. This is normal.
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder
If your originals do not feed when placed in the ADF, try these solutions:
• Make sure the ADF icon appears on the LCD screen. If not, reload the originals.
• Make sure the size, weight, and number of your originals are supported by the ADF.
• Make sure the originals are loaded correctly.
364
• Try cleaning the inside of the ADF.
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Related references
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Related tasks
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Cleaning Your Product
Solving Paper Problems
Check these sections if you have problems using paper with your product.
Paper Feeding Problems
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
Paper Ejection Problems
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Paper Feeding Problems
If you have problems feeding paper, try these solutions:
• If paper does not feed for printing, remove it from the rear feed slot or cassette. Reload it, then adjust
the edge guides. Make sure the paper stack is not above the tab on the edge guides inside the
cassette or rear feed slot.
• Be sure to insert the paper cassette all the way into your product.
• If multiple pages feed at once, remove the paper, fan the edges to separate the sheets, and reload it.
• Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
365
• If paper jams when you print on both sides of the paper, try loading fewer sheets.
• Make sure the paper size and paper type settings are correct for the paper source.
• Load and eject paper without printing to clean the paper path.
• If paper does not feed correctly after replacing the maintenance rollers, make sure you installed the
maintenance rollers correctly.
• If you installed an optional paper cassette unit, be sure to enable the cassette unit in the printing
software.
• If your product pauses during printing, make sure the front cover is closed.
• The maintenance rollers may be at the end of their service life. Check the maintenance roller status
and replace them if necessary.
• For best results, follow these guidelines:
• Use new, smooth, high-quality paper that is not curled, creased, old, too thin, or too thick.
• Load paper in the cassette printable side down.
• Do not load binder paper with holes in the cassette.
• Follow any special loading instructions that came with the paper.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
Paper Loading Capacity
Paper Specifications
Related tasks
Cleaning the Paper Guide
Related topics
Loading Paper
366
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
If paper has jammed in the front cover, follow the steps here to clear the jam.
1. Cancel the print job, if necessary.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove any paper inside, including torn pieces.
Caution: Be careful to not touch any parts inside the product to prevent damage to it.
4. Close the front cover.
Note: If any torn pieces of paper remain in the product, select Setup > Maintenance > Remove
Paper after clearing the paper jam error.
367
5. Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages. If you still see a paper jam
message, check the other paper jam solutions.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
If paper has jammed in the rear paper feed slot, carefully remove the paper.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
If paper has jammed in the front paper feed slot, follow the steps here to clear the jam.
1. Cancel the print job, if necessary.
368
2. Close the output tray.
3. Remove the output tray and pull out the paper cassette.
4. Pull the lever to lower the cover.
369
5. Carefully remove any paper jammed inside the product.
6. Raise the cover.
7. Reattach the output tray and insert the paper cassette.
8. Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages. If you still see a paper jam
message, check the other paper jam solutions.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
370
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
If paper has jammed in the cassette, follow the steps here to clear the jam.
Note: If the optional paper cassette units are installed, do not remove more than one paper cassette at a
time.
1. Cancel the print job, if necessary.
2. Pull out the paper cassette.
371
3. Carefully remove any paper jammed inside the product.
4. Carefully follow all paper loading instructions and reload the paper.
5. Keep the cassette flat as you gently insert it.
6. Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages. If you still see a paper jam
message, check the other paper jam solutions.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
If paper has jammed in the rear cover 1, follow the steps here to clear the jam.
1. Cancel the print job, if necessary.
372
2. Open rear cover 1 (D1).
3. Carefully remove any jammed paper.
373
4. Pull out rear cover 2 (D2).
5. Remove any jammed paper from the duplexer.
6. Insert rear cover 2 (D2).
7. Close rear cover 1 (D1).
8. Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages. If you still see a paper jam
message, check the other paper jam solutions.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
374
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
If paper has jammed in any of the optional paper cassettes, follow the steps here to clear the jam.
1. Cancel the print job, if necessary.
2. Open rear cover (E) on the optional paper cassette unit with the jammed paper.
375
3. Carefully remove any paper jammed inside.
4. Close rear cover (E).
5. Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages. If you still see a paper jam
message, check the other paper jam solutions.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
376
Document Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder (F)
If you have problems with document jams in the automatic document feeder (ADF), follow the steps here
to clear the jam.
1. Cancel the print job, if necessary.
2. Remove your originals from the ADF.
3. Raise the lever and open the ADF cover.
377
4. Carefully remove any jammed pages.
5. Close the ADF cover, then raise the document cover.
378
6. Carefully remove any jammed pages.
7. Lower the document cover.
379
8. Raise the ADF input tray and carefully remove any jammed pages.
9. Lower the ADF input tray.
10. Reload your originals.
Caution: Make sure you do not load the ADF beyond its capacity for your paper size. Also make sure
your originals are not bent, folded, or curled and do not have tape, staples, or other materials that
could obstruct the feeder.
11. Follow the prompts on the LCD screen to clear any error messages. If you still see a paper jam
message, check the other paper jam solutions.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Cover (A)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Paper Feed Slot (B1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Front Paper Feed Slot (B2)
Paper Jam Problems in the Cassette (C1/C2/C3/C4)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover 1 (D1)
Paper Jam Problems in the Rear Cover (E) of the Optional Paper Cassette Unit
380
Paper Ejection Problems
If you have problems with paper ejecting properly, try these solutions:
• If paper does not eject fully, you may have set the wrong paper size. Cancel printing to eject the paper.
Select the correct paper size when you reprint.
• If paper is wrinkled when it ejects, it may be damp or too thin. Load new paper and be sure to select
the correct paper type setting when you reprint.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
Related topics
Loading Paper
Solving PostScript Printing Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems using the PostScript printing software.
Nothing Prints Using the Postscript Printing Software
Documents Print Incorrectly Using the Postscript Printing Software
Accessing Printer Properties - Postscript - Windows
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Nothing Prints Using the Postscript Printing Software
If your document doesn't print, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and properly connected.
• Make sure the printing language setting on the control panel is correct.
• If Text Detection is enabled on the control panel and you cannot print text, set the printing language
to PS3.
• Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program.
• In Windows, the product may not print if a large number of print jobs are sent. Try selecting Print
directly to the printer on the Advanced tab in the printer properties.
Parent topic: Solving PostScript Printing Problems
381
Related topics
Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Documents Print Incorrectly Using the Postscript Printing Software
If your document does not print correctly, try these solutions:
• If the file you are printing was created in an application that allows you to change the data format, such
as Adobe Photoshop, make sure the settings in the application match the printer driver settings.
• EPS files created in binary format may not print correctly. Try creating the file in ASCII format instead.
• In Windows, the product cannot print binary data if it is connected to the computer using a USB cable.
Try selecting ASCII or TBCP as the Output Protocol setting on the Device Settings tab in the printer
properties.
• In Windows, select the appropriate substitution fonts on the Device Settings tab in the printer
properties.
• If the printed colors are incorrect, try adjusting the Color Mode setting on the Advanced tab of the
printing software.
• If printing is slow, try selecting Fast as the Print Quality setting on the Advanced tab of the printing
software.
Parent topic: Solving PostScript Printing Problems
Related tasks
Accessing Printer Properties - Postscript - Windows
Accessing Printer Properties - Postscript - Windows
You can access the printer properties to view and change product settings.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click the postscript driver for your product, and select Printer
properties.
• Windows 7: Click
and select Devices and Printers. Right-click the postscript driver for your
product and select Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click
and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click the postscript driver for your product and select Properties.
382
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. Right-click the postscript driver for your
product and select Properties.
2. Click any tab to view and change the printer property settings.
Parent topic: Solving PostScript Printing Problems
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Check these sections if you have problems while printing from your computer.
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this
manual. See the Apple website for details.
Note: For problems while printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer
software, see the sections covering that software in this manual.
Nothing Prints
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar
Printing is Slow
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Nothing Prints
If you have sent a print job and nothing prints, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on.
• Make sure any interface cables are connected securely at both ends.
• If you connected your product to a USB hub, make sure it is a first-tier hub. If it still does not print,
connect your product directly to your computer instead of the hub.
• Run a product check to see if a test page prints. If the test page prints, check to see if your product
software is installed correctly.
• If you are printing a large image, the computer may not have enough memory. Print the image at a
lower resolution or a smaller file size.
• In Windows, click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window and check for
the following:
• Check for any stalled or paused print jobs. Cancel or unpause any jobs as necessary.
• Open the Printer menu and make sure the product is not offline.
383
• Open the Printer menu and set the product as the default printer, if necessary.
• In OS X, select System Preferences from the Apple menu or Dock, select Print & Scan or Printers
& Scanners, then double-click your printer icon. Check to see if any jobs are paused. Cancel or
unpause any jobs as necessary.
• If the user restriction feature (Access Control) is enabled, a user ID and password is required to print.
If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
Note: In OS X, you may not be able to print if the user restriction feature is enabled. Contact your
administrator for assistance.
• If you are using AirPrint, make sure AirPrint is enabled with the correct settings using Web Config.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Related tasks
Running a Product Check
Using AirPrint
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar
If you do not see your product icon in the Windows taskbar, first try restarting your computer. If that does
not work, try this solution:
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
• Windows 7: Click
and select Devices and Printers.
• Windows Vista: Click
, select Control Panel, and click Printer under Hardware and Sound.
• Windows XP: Click Start and select Printers and Faxes. (Or open the Control Panel, select
Printers and Other Hardware, if necessary, and Printers and Faxes.)
2. Right-click your product name, select Printing Preferences, and select your product name again if
necessary.
3. Click the Maintenance tab.
4. Click the Extended Settings button.
5. Select Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3, then click OK.
384
6. Click the Monitoring Preferences button.
7. Click the checkbox for the option that adds the shortcut icon to the taskbar.
8. Click OK to close the open program windows.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Printing is Slow
If printing becomes slow, try these solutions:
• Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a highresolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. If necessary, increase your
system's memory.
• If you are using Windows 7, close the Devices and Printers window before you print.
• Make sure Quiet Mode is turned off.
• Clear space on your hard drive or run a defragmentation utility to free up existing space.
• Close any programs you are not using when you print.
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
• If printing becomes slower after printing continuously for a long time, the product may have
automatically slowed down to protect the print mechanism from overheating or becoming damaged.
Let the product rest with the power on for 30 minutes, then try printing again.
For the fastest printing, select the following settings in your product software:
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Turn on any high speed settings in your product software.
• Select a lower print quality setting.
• Make sure the ink drying time has not been increased for double-sided printing.
• Windows: Click the Maintenance tab, select Extended Settings, and select the following settings:
• High Speed Copies
• Always Spool RAW Datatype
• Page Rendering Mode
• Print as Bitmap
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
385
Related references
Windows System Requirements
OS X System Requirements
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Check these sections if you have problems with the layout or content of your printed pages.
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this
manual. See the Apple website for details.
Inverted Image
Too Many Copies Print
Blank Pages Print
Incorrect Margins on Printout
Incorrect Characters Print
Incorrect Image Size or Position
Slanted Printout
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Inverted Image
If your printed image is inverted unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Turn off any mirror or inversion settings in your printing application.
• Turn off the Mirror Image, Flip horizontally, or Reverse page orientation settings in your printer
software. (This option has different names, depending on your operating system version.)
Note: Leave these options turned on when you print on Epson Iron-on Cool Peel Transfer paper, if
available for your product.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
386
Related tasks
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Too Many Copies Print
Make sure that the Copies setting in your printing program or printer software is not set for multiple
copies.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Blank Pages Print
If blank pages print unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software.
• If a blank page exists in a document you are printing and you want to skip printing it, select the Skip
Blank Page setting in your printer software.
• Run a print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Selecting Printing Preferences - OS X
387
Incorrect Margins on Printout
If your printed page has incorrect margins, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software.
• Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program.
• Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the printer.
You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Related topics
Loading Paper
Incorrect Characters Print
If incorrect characters appear in your prints, try these solutions before reprinting:
• Make sure any cables are securely connected at both ends.
• In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in
the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs.
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
• If your computer entered sleep mode the last time you printed, the next print job after your computer
exits sleep mode may contain garbled characters. Print your document again.
• If incorrect characters still appear in your prints, try connecting your product using a different cable.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Incorrect Image Size or Position
If your printed image is the wrong size or in the wrong position, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size and layout settings in your printing program and printer
software.
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size on the control panel.
• Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the printer.
388
• Clean the scanner glass and document cover.
You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Selecting Page Setup Settings - OS X
Cleaning Your Product
Slanted Printout
If your printouts are slanted, try these solutions:
• Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Select a higher print quality setting in your printer software.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Align the print head.
• Make sure the product is not printing while tilted or at an angle.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Related topics
Loading Paper
Solving Print Quality Problems
Check these sections if your printouts have problems with print quality, but your image looks fine on your
computer screen.
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this
manual. See the Apple website for details.
White or Dark Lines in Printout
389
Blurry or Smeared Printout
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps
Grainy Printout
Incorrect Colors
Parent topic: Solving Problems
White or Dark Lines in Printout
If you notice white or dark lines in your prints (also called banding), try these solutions before you reprint:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Align the print head.
• You may need to replace the ink cartridges.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Alignment
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Printing Preferences - OS X
Related topics
Loading Paper
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
390
Blurry or Smeared Printout
If your printouts are blurry or smeared, try these solutions:
• Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
• Use a support sheet with special paper, or load special paper one sheet at a time.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
• Use Epson papers to ensure proper saturation and absorption of genuine Epson inks.
• Make sure the paper type setting in your product software matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• If you are printing on thick paper or envelopes, turn on the Thick Paper setting from the control panel
or select Thick Paper and Envelopes in the Extended Settings of the printer software. (Turning this
setting on will decrease print speed.)
• In Windows, if the paper is still smeared after selecting the Thick Paper and Envelopes setting,
select the Short Grain Paper setting in the Extended Settings of the printer software.
• Remove each sheet from the output tray as it is printed.
• Avoid handling printouts on glossy paper right after printing to allow the ink to set.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• If you print on both sides of a sheet of paper, smudges may appear on the reverse side of heavily
saturated or dark images. If one side of a sheet will contain a lighter image or text, print that side first.
Adjust the Print Density and/or Increase Ink Drying Time settings.
• If printed copies are smeared, lower the copy density setting on the control panel.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Align the print head.
• Clean the paper path.
Note: Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place it on a flat, stable surface that
extends beyond the base of the product in all directions.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
391
Print Head Alignment
Related references
Available Epson Papers
Paper Specifications
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - OS X
Selecting Printing Preferences - OS X
Cleaning the Paper Guide
Related topics
Loading Paper
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps
If your printouts are faint or have gaps, try these solutions:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• The ink cartridges may be old or low on ink, and you may need to replace them.
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
• Align the print head.
• Clean the paper path.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Alignment
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
392
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Cleaning the Paper Guide
Related topics
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Loading Paper
Grainy Printout
If your printouts are grainy, try these solutions:
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• Select a higher print quality setting and turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Align the print head.
• You may need to increase the image resolution or print a smaller size; see your software
documentation.
Note: Images from the Internet may be low resolution and not result in a high quality printout.
• If you enlarged the image in an image-editing program, you need to increase the resolution setting to
retain a high image quality. Increase the resolution by the same amount you increased the image size.
For example, if the resolution is 300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the image size later,
change the resolution setting to 600 dpi.
Note: Higher resolution settings result in larger file sizes, which take longer to process and print.
Consider the limitations of your computer system when selecting a resolution, and select the lowest
possible resolution that produces acceptable quality to keep file sizes manageable.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Alignment
393
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Selecting Printing Preferences - OS X
Related topics
Loading Paper
Incorrect Colors
If your printouts have incorrect colors, try these solutions:
• Make sure the Black/Grayscale or Grayscale setting is not selected in your printer software.
• If you selected Standard-Vivid (Windows) or Normal-Vivid (OS X) as the quality setting in the printer
software, try selecting Standard (Windows) or Normal (OS X) instead.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• The ink cartridges may be old or low on ink, and you may need to replace them.
• Your printed colors can never exactly match your on-screen colors. However, you can use a color
management system to get as close as possible. Try using the color management options in your
printer software.
• For best results, use genuine Epson ink and paper.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Related references
Available Epson Papers
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - OS X
Managing Color - OS X
394
Related topics
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Solving Scanning Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems scanning with your product.
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly
Cannot Start Epson Scan
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly
If your scanning software does not operate correctly, try these solutions:
• Make sure your computer has adequate memory and meets the system requirements for your
operating system.
• Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart your scanning software.
• If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall your scanning software, try reinstalling it.
Note: With OS X, in addition to scanning with Image Capture, you can download and install Epson
Scan scanning software. Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction
features for enhancing scanned images, and provides an interface for TWAIN-compliant OCR
scanning software. To download Epson Scan, visit Epson's driver download site (U.S. downloads or
Canadian downloads).
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems
Related concepts
When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Related references
Windows System Requirements
OS X System Requirements
Related tasks
Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture
395
Cannot Start Epson Scan
If you cannot start Epson Scan, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any interface cables are securely connected at both ends.
• Make sure Epson Scan is selected in your scanning program.
• Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart Epson Scan.
• Check the connection setting and test the connection using Epson Scan Settings:
Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select EPSON Scan Settings. Make sure the correct
Connection setting is selected, then click the Test button.
Windows (other versions): Click
or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > EPSON
Scan > EPSON Scan Settings. Make sure the correct Connection setting is selected, then click the
Test button.
OS X: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click EPSON Scan Settings. Make
sure the correct Connection setting is selected, then click the Test button.
• Make sure you do not have multiple versions of Epson Scan installed. If you do, uninstall both versions
and install one version.
• If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall Epson Scan, try reinstalling it.
Note: With OS X, in addition to scanning with Image Capture, you can download and install Epson Scan
scanning software. Epson Scan provides additional image adjustment and photo correction features for
enhancing scanned images, and provides an interface for TWAIN-compliant OCR scanning software. To
download Epson Scan, visit Epson's driver download site (U.S. downloads or Canadian downloads).
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems
Related tasks
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan Icon
Scanning with OS X Using Image Capture
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning - Windows
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Check these sections if a scanned image on your computer screen has a quality problem.
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images
396
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked
Image is Distorted or Blurry
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
Image is Too Dark
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors
Scan Area is Not Adjustable in Thumbnail Preview
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only
If your scanned image consists only of a few dots, try these solutions:
• Make sure you placed your original for scanning facing the correct way.
• If you are scanning using the Epson Scan Black & White setting, adjust the Threshold setting and
scan again.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related references
Available Image Adjustments - Office Mode
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images
If a line of dots appears in all your scanned images, clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free
cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not
recommended.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related tasks
Cleaning Your Product
397
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked
If straight lines in an original appear crooked in a scanned image, make sure to place your original
straight when you scan it.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Image is Distorted or Blurry
If a scanned image appears distorted or blurry, try these solutions:
• Make sure your original is not wrinkled or warped. This may prevent the original from laying flat on the
scanner glass.
• Do not move your original or your product during scanning.
• Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place it on a flat, stable surface that
extends beyond the base of the product in all directions.
• Adjust these Epson Scan settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Select the Unsharp Mask setting.
• Adjust the Auto Exposure setting.
• Increase the Resolution setting.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related topics
Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
If you are scanning a thick or warped original, cover its edges with paper to block external light as you
scan it.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Image is Too Dark
If your scanned image is too dark, try these solutions:
• Adjust these Epson Scan settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Auto Exposure
398
• Brightness
• Histogram Adjustment
• Check the brightness and contrast settings of your computer monitor.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related topics
Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image
If an image from the back of a thin original appears in your scanned image, place a piece of black paper
on the back of the original and scan it again.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image
You may see a ripple pattern (called a moiré) in scanned images of printed documents. This is caused
by interference from differing pitches in the scanner's screen and your original's halftone screen. To
reduce this effect, adjust these Epson Scan settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Select the Descreening setting.
• Select a lower Resolution setting.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related topics
Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors
Printed colors can never exactly match the colors on your computer monitor because printers and
monitors use different color systems: monitors use RGB (red, green, and blue) and printers typically use
CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black).
Check the color matching and color management capabilities of your computer, display adapter, and the
software you are using to see if they are affecting the palette of colors you see on your screen.
To adjust the colors in your scanned image, adjust these Epson Scan settings (if available) and try
scanning again:
• Change the Image Type setting and experiment with different combinations of the next settings.
• Adjust the Tone Correction setting.
399
• Adjust the Auto Exposure setting.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related topics
Selecting Epson Scan Settings
Scan Area is Not Adjustable in Thumbnail Preview
If you cannot adjust the scan area while viewing a Thumbnail preview in Epson Scan, try these solutions:
• Create a scan area by drawing a marquee on your preview image and adjusting it as necessary.
• Switch to Normal preview mode, if available, and preview your image again.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related concepts
Image Preview Guidelines
Related tasks
Selecting a Scan Area - Office Mode
Selecting a Scan Size - Professional Mode
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped
If the edges of a scanned image are cropped, make sure your original is placed correctly for scanning. If
necessary, move your original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Solving Faxing Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems faxing with your product.
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
Fax Memory Full Error Appears
Sent Fax Quality is Poor
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size
Received Fax Quality is Poor
Received Fax is Not Printed
400
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
If you cannot send or receive faxes, try these solutions:
• If an error code is displayed on the control panel, try the solutions suggested in the error code list.
• If you are faxing from a computer, use the Epson FAX Utility to send your fax.
• Make sure the recipient's fax machine is turned on and working.
• Make sure paper is loaded correctly in your product.
• Make sure you have set up your header information and have not blocked your caller ID. Otherwise,
your faxes might be rejected by the recipient's fax machine.
• If user restriction has been enabled, you may need to enter a user name and password. Contact your
administrator for assistance.
• If you did not connect a telephone to your product, set the Receive Mode setting to Auto so you can
receive faxes automatically.
• Check that the cable connecting your telephone wall jack to your product's LINE port is secure.
• Print a fax connection report using your product control panel or fax software to help diagnose the
problem.
• Verify that the telephone wall jack works by connecting a phone to it and testing it.
• If there is no dial tone and you connected the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line
or Terminal Adapter, change the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the
turn off the product's dial tone detection setting. (Turning off the dial tone setting may cause the
product to drop the first digit of a fax number.)
• If you connected your product to a DSL phone line, you must connect a DSL filter to the phone jack to
enable faxing over the line. Contact your DSL provider for the necessary filter.
• If your telephone line has static, turn off your product's error correction mode fax communication
setting and try faxing again.
• Try lowering your product's fax speed setting.
• Make sure the error correction mode (ECM) setting is turned on if you are trying to send or receive a
color fax.
• If your telephone line uses call waiting and you have trouble receiving faxes, turn off call waiting to
prevent disruption of incoming faxes.
401
• If you have subscribed to a call forwarding service, the product may not be able to receive faxes.
Contact your service provider for assistance.
• Check your inbox and delete faxes after reading or printing them. If the inbox is full, the product cannot
receive faxes.
• If you cannot send faxes at a specified time, make sure the date and time are set correctly on the
product.
• If you cannot receive A3-size faxes, make sure you selected the correct paper size setting for the
paper source containing the A3-size paper. Also, be sure to enable the paper source to receive faxes
as the Auto Select Settings option.
Note: If your product is connected to a VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) phone line, keep in mind that
fax machines are designed to work over analog phone lines. Epson cannot guarantee that fax
transmission will work when using VoIP.
If your phone line includes voice mail answering services, calls or faxes may be inadvertently received
by your voice mail service.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Status Menu Error Codes
Related tasks
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Using the Fax Setup Wizard
Selecting the Line Type
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Receiving Faxes Automatically
Printing Fax Reports
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen
Related topics
Loading Paper
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
If you cannot receive faxes when a telephone is connected to your product, try these solutions:
• Make sure your telephone is connected to your product's EXT port.
• Make sure the Receive Mode is set to Manual.
402
Note: When answering a call that is a fax, wait until the product's LCD screen displays a message that a
connection has been made before you hang up.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related tasks
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Using the Fax Setup Wizard
Fax Memory Full Error Appears
If you see an error message telling you that the product's fax memory is full, try these solutions:
• If you set the product to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, delete any faxes you
have already read.
• If you set the product to save received faxes on a computer, turn on the selected computer. Once the
faxes are saved on the computer, they are deleted from the product's memory.
• If you set the product to save received faxes on a memory device, connect the selected memory
device containing the save fax folder, to the product. Once the faxes are saved on the memory device,
they are deleted from the product's memory.
Note: Make sure the memory device has enough available memory and is not write protected.
• If the memory is full, try sending a monochrome fax using the Direct Send feature or sending your
faxes in smaller batches.
• If the product cannot print a received fax due to a product error, such as a paper jam, the memory full
error may appear. Clear any product errors, then ask the sender to resend the fax.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Output Settings - Fax
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen
Sent Fax Quality is Poor
If the sent fax quality is poor, try these solutions:
• Clean the scanner glass.
403
• Clean the ADF.
• Try changing the resolution setting on the control panel.
• Try adjusting the density setting on the control panel.
• If you are sending a monochrome fax to a single recipient, try sending the fax using the Direct Send
feature.
Note: If you send a high resolution monochrome fax without using the Direct Send feature, the
product may automatically lower the resolution.
• Try enabling the error correction mode (ECM) setting.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Basic Settings - Fax
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Cleaning Your Product
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size
If your recipient receives a fax in an incorrect size, try these solutions:
• If you are trying to fax an A3-size document, make sure the recipient's fax machine supports the paper
size. If the message OK (Reduced Size) appears in the fax transmission report, the recipient's fax
machine does not support A3-size documents.
• If you are sending a fax using the scanner glass, make sure your original is placed correctly on the
scanner glass and that the correct paper size is selected on the control panel.
• Clean the scanner glass and document cover.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related tasks
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Cleaning Your Product
404
Received Fax Quality is Poor
If you receive a poor quality fax, try these solutions:
• Try enabling the error correction mode (ECM) setting.
• Contact the fax sender and ask them to send the fax in a higher resolution.
• Try reprinting the received fax.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Basic Settings - Fax
Received Fax is Not Printed
If a received fax is not printed, try these solutions:
• Make sure the product is clear of any errors. The product cannot print received faxes if an error has
occurred with the product, such as a paper jam.
• If the product has been set to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, received faxes
are not automatically printed. Check the Fax Output setting on the product control panel and change
it, if necessary.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Output Settings - Fax
Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems using USB flash drives with your product.
Cannot View or Print from a USB Flash Drive
Cannot Save Files on a USB Flash Drive
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Flash Drive
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Cannot View or Print from a USB Flash Drive
If you cannot view or print photos or documents from a USB flash drive inserted in your product, try these
solutions:
• Make sure memory devices are enabled.
405
• Make sure your drive is compatible with the product.
• Make sure the files on your drive are in the correct format.
Parent topic: Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
Related references
Interface Specifications
USB Device Photo File Specifications
Related tasks
Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer
Related topics
Viewing and Printing From the LCD Screen
Cannot Save Files on a USB Flash Drive
If you cannot save files on a USB flash drive inserted in your product, try these solutions:
• To save faxes on a USB flash drive, you need to create a folder in the Fax Output settings on the
product control panel.
• Make sure the drive is not write-protected.
• Make sure the drive has enough available space.
• Make sure memory devices are enabled.
• Make sure the drive is compatible with the product.
Parent topic: Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
Related references
Interface Specifications
Output Settings - Fax
Related tasks
Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers From Your Computer
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Flash Drive
If you have problems transferring files to or from a USB flash drive inserted in your product, try these
solutions:
• Make sure your flash drive is compatible with the product.
• Make sure your product is securely connected to your computer.
406
• Make sure that the file sharing setting for your product is set correctly.
Parent topic: Solving USB Flash Drive Problems
Related references
Interface Specifications
Related topics
Transferring Files on a USB Flash Drive
When to Uninstall Your Product Software
If you have a problem that requires you to uninstall and re-install your software, follow the instructions for
your operating system.
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Uninstalling Product Software - OS X
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
You can uninstall and then re-install your product software to solve certain problems.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Disconnect any interface cables.
3. Do one of the following:
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Programs > Programs
and Features. Select the uninstall option for your Epson product, then select Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
Select your product again, if necessary, then select OK, and click Yes to confirm the
uninstallation.
• Windows (other versions): Click
or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
EPSON, select your product, then click EPSON Printer Software Uninstall.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
In the next window, select your product and click OK. Then follow any on-screen instructions.
407
4. Do one of the following to uninstall Epson Event Manager, then follow any on-screen instructions:
• Windows 8.x: Select Epson Event Manager and click Uninstall.
• Windows 7/Windows Vista: Open the Windows Control Panel utility. Select Programs and
Features. (In Classic view, select Programs and click Uninstall a program.) Select Epson
Event Manager and click Uninstall/Change.
• Windows XP: Open the Windows Control Panel utility. Double-click Add or Remove Programs.
Select Epson Event Manager and click Change/Remove.
5. Do one of the following to uninstall Epson Scan, then follow any on-screen instructions:
• Windows 8.x/Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select EPSON Scan and click Uninstall/Change.
• Windows XP: Select EPSON Scan and click Change/Remove.
6. Restart your computer, then see the Start Here sheet to re-install your software.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
Parent topic: When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Uninstalling Product Software - OS X
In most cases, you do not need to uninstall your product software before re-installing it. However, you
can download the Uninstaller utility from the Epson support website to uninstall your product software as
described here.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
1. To download the Uninstaller utility, visit the Epson download site (U.S. downloads or Canadian
downloads).
2. Follow the instructions on the screen to install the Uninstaller utility.
3. Quit all applications currently running on your Mac.
4. Double-click the Uninstaller icon.
5. Select the checkbox for each software program you want to uninstall.
6. Click Uninstall.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
8. To reinstall your product software, see the Start Here sheet for instructions.
408
Note: If you uninstall the printer driver and your product name remains in the Print & Fax, Print & Scan,
or Printers & Scanners window, select your product name and click the – (remove) icon to remove it.
Parent topic: When to Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help
If you need to contact Epson for technical support services, use the following support options.
Internet Support
Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) for solutions to
common problems. You can download drivers and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting
advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.
Speak to a Support Representative
Before you call Epson for support, please have the following information ready:
• Product name
• Product serial number (located on a label on the product)
• Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
• Computer configuration
• Description of the problem
Then call:
• U.S.: (562) 276-4382, 6 AM to 8 PM, Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, and 7 AM to 4 PM, Pacific
Time, Saturday
• Canada: (905) 709-3839, 6 AM to 8 PM, Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, and 7 AM to 4 PM,
Pacific Time, Saturday
Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice. Toll or long distance charges may
apply.
Purchase Supplies and Accessories
You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at Epson Supplies Central at epson.com/ink3 (U.S.
sales) or epson.ca (Canadian sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller.
To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766).
Parent topic: Solving Problems
409
Technical Specifications
These sections list the technical specifications for your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life products. Please go to this site for information on
how to return your products for proper disposal.
Windows System Requirements
OS X System Requirements
Scanning Specifications
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Fax Specifications
Paper Specifications
Printable Area Specifications
Ink Cartridge Specifications
Dimension Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Interface Specifications
External USB Device Specifications
Network Interface Specifications
Safety and Approvals Specifications
PS3 Mode Fonts
PCL5 Mode Fonts
PCL6 Mode Fonts
Symbol Sets
Windows System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your computer should use one of these Microsoft operating
systems:
• Windows 8.x
• Windows 7
• Windows Vista
410
• Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
• Windows XP SP3
• Windows Server 2012*
• Windows Server 2008R2*
• Windows Server 2008*
• Windows Server 2003R2*
• Windows Server 2003*
* Windows Server supports only the printer driver and Epson Scan; any additional included software is
not supported.
Note: Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) for the
latest in compatibility and drivers for your product.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
OS X System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your Mac should use one of these operating systems:
• OS X 10.9.x
• OS X 10.8.x
• OS X 10.7.x
• OS X 10.6.x
• OS X 10.5.8
Note: Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) for the
latest in compatibility and drivers for your product.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Scanning Specifications
Scanner type
Flatbed, color
Photoelectric device
CIS
411
Effective pixels
14040 × 20400 pixels at 1200 dpi
Document size
Maximum: 11.7 × 17 inches (297 × 431.8 mm)
Scanning resolution
1200 dpi (main scan)
2400 dpi (sub scan)
Output resolution
50 to 4800, 7200, and 9600 dpi
(50 to 4800 dpi in 1 dpi increments)
Image data
Color:
10 bits per pixel per color internal
8 bits per pixel per color external
Black and white:
10 bits per pixel per color internal
1 to 8 bits per pixel per color external
Light source
LED
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Paper size
A5 to A3
Paper type
Plain paper
Paper weight
14 lb (52 g/m2) to 28 lb (105 g/m2)
Sheet feeding capacity
Total thickness: 0.2 inch (5 mm)
Approximately 50 sheets at 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Fax Specifications
Fax type
Walk up, black-and-white and color fax capability (ITU-T Super
Group 3)
412
Support lines
Standard analog telephone lines
PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone systems
Speed
Up to 33.6 kbps
Resolution
Monochrome
Standard: 203 pixels per inch × 98 lines per inch
(8 pixels per mm × 3.85 lines per mm)
Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 196 lines per inch
(8 pixels per mm × 7.7 lines per mm)
Super Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch
(8 pixels per mm × 15.4 lines per mm)
Ultra Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch
(8 pixels per mm × 15.4 lines per mm)
Photo: 203 pixels per inch × 196 lines per inch
(8 pixels per mm × 7.7 lines per mm)
Color
Fine: 200 × 200 dpi
Photo: 200 × 200 dpi
Error correction mode
CCITU/ITU Group 3 fax with error correction mode
Page memory
Up to 550 pages (ITU-T No. 1 chart; monochrome draft mode )
Redial
2 times (with 1 minute intervals)
Interface
RJ-11 Phone Line
RJ-11 Telephone set connection
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Paper Specifications
Note: Since the quality of any particular brand or type of paper may be changed by the manufacturer at
any time, Epson cannot guarantee the quality of any non-Epson brand or type of paper. Always test a
sample of paper stock before purchasing large quantities or printing large jobs.
413
Single-sheets
Size
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm)
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
3.5 × 5 inches (89 × 127 mm)
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm)
16:9 wide (4 × 7.1 inches [102 × 181 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 279 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Paper types
Plain paper and paper distributed by Epson
Weight
17 lb (64 g/m2) to 68 lb (256 g/m2)
Envelopes
Size
No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
Paper types
Plain bond paper
Weight
20 lb (75 g/m2) to 24 lb (90 g/m2)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
414
Printable Area Specifications
Single sheets
1
0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum
2
1.81 inch (46 mm) minimum
3
2.01 inch (51 mm) minimum
Envelopes
415
1
0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum
2
0.20 inch (5 mm) minimum
3
0.71 inch (18 mm) minimum
4
1.81 inch (46 mm) minimum
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Ink Cartridge Specifications
Note: This product uses only genuine Epson-brand cartridges. Other brands of ink cartridges and ink
supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function properly.
The cartridges included with the printer are designed for printer setup and not for resale. After some ink
is used for priming, the rest is available for printing. Yields vary considerably based on images printed,
print settings, paper type, frequency of use, and temperature. For print quality, a variable amount of ink
remains in the cartridge after the "replace cartridge" indicator comes on.
Color
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black
Cartridge life
Opened package: 6 months
Unopened package: do not use if the date on the package has
expired
Temperature
Storage: –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C)
1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Ink freezes at –9.4 °F (–23 °C)
Ink thaws and is usable after 3 hours at 77 °F (25 °C)
Note: For best printing results, use up a cartridge within 6 months after installing it.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Dimension Specifications
Height
Stored: 18.3 inches (464 mm)
(printer only)
Printing: 22.1 inches (562 mm)
416
Height
Stored: 44.6 inches (1132 mm)
(printer with three optional
cassette units and cabinet)
Printing: 48.4 inches (1230 mm)
Width
Stored: 23.2 inches (590 mm)
(printer only)
Printing: 23.2 inches (590 mm)
Width
Stored: 27.2 inches (690 mm)
(printer with three optional
cassette units and cabinet)
Printing: 27.2 inches (690 mm)
Depth
Stored: 22.4 inches (570 mm)
(printer only)
Printing: 35.5 inches (902 mm)
Depth
Stored: 31.5 inches (800 mm)
(printer with three optional
cassette units and cabinet)
Printing: 35.8 inches (910 mm)
Weight*
77.8 lb (35.3 kg)
(printer only)
Weight*
194.7 lb (88.3 kg)
(printer with three optional
cassette units and cabinet)
* Without ink cartridges or power cord
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Power supply rating
100 to 240 V
220 to 240 V
Rated frequency range
50/60 Hz
Rated current
100 to 240 V model: 1.2 to 0.6 A
220 to 240 V model: 0.8 A
417
Power consumption
Standalone copying: Approx. 39 W (ISO/IEC24712)
(100 to 240 V model)
Ready mode: 17 W
Sleep mode: 2.4 W
Power off mode: 0.4 W
Power consumption
Standalone copying: Approx. 39 W (ISO/IEC24712)
(220 to 240 V model)
Ready mode: 17 W
Sleep mode: 2.9 W
Power off mode: 0.5 W
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Operating: 50 to 95 °F (10 to 35 °C)
Storage: –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C)
1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Humidity
Operating: 20 to 80% RH
(without condensation)
Storage: 5 to 85% RH
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Interface Specifications
Interface type
Hi-Speed USB (for computer)
Hi-Speed USB (for external USB device)
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally connected devices.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Related references
USB Device Photo File Specifications
418
External USB Device Specifications
Do not use devices with the following requirements:
• Dedicated driver
• Security settings
• Built-in USB hub
Note: Use only external storage devices with independent AC power sources. External storage devices
that are powered via USB are not recommended. Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally
connected devices.
Magneto-optical drive
1.3GB
Hard disk and USB flash
drives
2TB
Formatted in FAT, FAT32, or exFAT.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Network Interface Specifications
Wi-Fi
Standards
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n; complies with either IEEE 802.11 b/g or IEEE
802.11 b/g/n, depending on purchase location
Wireless security
WEP (64/128 bit)
WPA-PSK (AES); complies with WPA2 with support for WPA/WPA2
Personal
WPA-2 Enterprise
Frequency range
2.4 GHz
419
Coordination modes
Infrastructure mode
Ad hoc mode (not supported for IEEE 802.11n)
Wi-Fi Direct mode (not supported for IEEE 802.11b or IEEE
802.11n)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct Simple AP mode available even if you connect
the product to an Ethernet network.
Ethernet
Standards
IEEE802.3i (10BASE-T)
IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T); to prevent risk of radio interference,
use a Category-5e or higher shielded twisted pair cable
IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet); connected device should
be IEEE802.3az compliant
Communication mode
Auto, 10Mbps Full duplex, 10Mbps Half duplex, 100Mbps Full
duplex, 100Mbps Half duplex
Connector
RJ-45
Security Protocol
• IEEE802.1X (requires a connected device compliant with IEEE802.1X)
• IPsec/IP Filtering
• SSL/TLS; HTTPS Server/Client and IPPS
• SNMPv3
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Safety and Approvals Specifications
United States
Safety: UL60950-1
EMC: FCC part 15 Subpart B class B
420
Canada
Safety: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
EMC: CAN/CSA-CEI/IEC CISPR 22 Class B
This equipment contains the following wireless module:
• Manufacturer: Askey Computer Corporation.
• Type: WLU6117-D69 (RoHS)
This product conforms to Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Epson cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and
away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed
outdoors is subject to licensing.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
PS3 Mode Fonts
Albertus, Albertus Italic, Albertus Light
AntiqueOlive Roman, AntiqueOlive Italic, AntiqueOlive Bold, AntiqueOlive Compact
Apple Chancery
ITC AvantGarde Gothic Book, ITC AvantGarde Gothic Book Oblique, ITC AvantGarde Gothic Demi,
ITC AvantGarde Gothic Demi Oblique
Bodoni, Bodoni Italic, Bodoni Bold, Bodoni Bold Italic, Bodoni Poster, Bodoni Poster Compressed
ITC Bookman Light, ITC Bookman Light Italic, ITC Bookman Demi, ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Carta
Chicago
Clarendon, Clarendon Light, Clarendon Bold
CooperBlack, CooperBlack Italic
Copperplate Gothic 32BC, Copperplate Gothic 33BC
Coronet
421
Courier, Courier Oblique, Courier Bold, Courier Bold Oblique
GillSans, GillSans Italic, GillSans Bold, GillSans Bold Italic, GillSansCondensed, GillSans Condensed
Bold, GillSans Light, GillSans Light Italic, GillSans Extra Bold
Eurostile, Eurostile Bold, Eurostile Extended Two, Eurostile Bold Extended Two
Geneva
Goudy Oldstyle, Goudy Oldstyle Italic, Goudy Bold, Goudy BoldItalic, Goudy ExtraBold
Helvetica, Helvetica Oblique, Helvetica Bold, Helvetica Bold Oblique, Helvetica Condensed, Helvetica
Condensed Oblique, Helvetica Condensed Bold, Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique, Helvetica
Narrow, Helvetica Narrow Oblique, Helvetica Narrow Bold, Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Hoefler Text, Hoefler Text Italic, Hoefler Text Black, Hoefler Text Black Italic, Hoefler Text Ornaments
Joanna, Joanna Italic, Joanna Bold, Joanna Bold Italic
LetterGothic, LetterGothic Slanted, LetterGothic Bold, LetterGothic Bold Slanted
ITC Lubalin Graph Book, ITC Lubalin Graph Book Oblique, ITC Lubalin Graph Demi, ITC Lubalin Graph
Demi Oblique
Marigold
Monaco
ITC Mona Lisa Recut
New Century Schoolbook Roman, New Century Schoolbook Italic, New Century Schoolbook Bold, New
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
New York
Optima, Optima Italic, Optima Bold, Optima Bold Italic
Oxford
Palatino Roman, Palatino Italic, Palatino Bold, Palatino Bold Italic
Stempel Garamond Roman, Stempel Garamond Italic, Stempel Garamond Bold, Stempel Garamond
Bold Italic
Symbol
Tekton
Times Roman, Times Italic, Times Bold, Times Bold Italic
Univers, Univers Oblique, Univers Bold, Univers Bold Oblique, Univers Light, Univers Light Oblique
422
UniversCondensed, UniversCondensed Oblique, UniversCondensed Bold, UniversCondensed Bold
Oblique
UniversExtended , UniversExtended Oblique, UniversExtended Bold, UniversExtended Bold Oblique
Wingdings
ITC ZapfChancery Medium Italic
ITC ZapfDingbats
Arial, Arial Italic, Arial Bold, Arial Bold Italic
Times New Roman, Times New Roman Italic, Times New Roman Bold, Times New Roman Bold Italic
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
PCL5 Mode Fonts
Scalable Fonts
Font name
Family
HP equivalent
Symbol set
FixedPitch 810
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Courier
1
FixedPitch 850
Regular, Bold, Italic,
Letter Gothic
1
FixedPitch 810 Dark
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Courier PS
3
Dutch 801
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
CG Times
2
Zapf Humanist 601
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
CG Omega
3
Ribbon 131
—
Coronet
3
Clarendon 701
—
Clarendon Condensed
3
Swiss 742
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Univers
2
Swiss 742 Condensed
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Univers Condensed
3
Incised 901
Medium, Bold, Italic
Antique Olive
3
423
Font name
Family
HP equivalent
Symbol set
Aldine 430
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Garamond
3
Calligraphic 401
—
Marigold
3
Flareserif 821
Medium, Extra Bold
Albertus
3
Swiss 721 SWM
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Arial
3
Dutch 801 SWM
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Times New
3
Swiss 721 SWA
Medium, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Oblique
Helvetica
3
Swiss 721 Narrow
SWA
Medium, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
3
Zapf Calligraphic 801
SWA
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Palatino
3
Geometric 711 SWA
Medium, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Italic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic
3
Revival 711 SWA
Light, Demi Bold, Light
Italic, Demi Bold Italic
ITC Bookman
3
Century 702 SWA
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
New Century Schoolbook
3
Dutch 801 SWA
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Times
3
Chancery 801 Medium
SWA Italic
—
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium
Italic
3
Symbol SWM
—
Symbol
4
More WingBats SWM
—
Wingdings
5
Ding Dings SWA
—
ITC Zapf Dingbats
6
Symbol SWA
—
SymbolPS
4
David BT
Medium, Bold
David
7
Narkis Tam BT
Medium, Bold
Narkis
7
424
Font name
Family
HP equivalent
Symbol set
Miryam BT
Medium, Bold, Italic
Miryam
7
Koufi BT
Medium, Bold
Koufi
8
Naskh BT
Medium, Bold
Naskh
8
Ryadh BT
Medium, Bold
Ryadh
8
Bitmap Font
Line Printer, Symbol set 9
OCR/Barcode Bitmap Font
Font name
Family
Symbol set
OCR A
—
10
OCR B
—
11
Code 39
9.37cpi, 4.68cpi
12
EAN/UPC
Medium, Bold
13
Note: Depending on the print density, or quality and color of the paper, the OCR/Barcode Bitmap fonts
may not be readable. Print a sample and check for readability before printing large quantities.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
PCL6 Mode Fonts
Scalable Fonts
Font name
Family
HP equivalent
Symbol set
FixedPitch 810
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Courier
1
FixedPitch 850
Regular, Bold, Italic,
Letter Gothic
1
FixedPitch 810 Dark
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Courier PS
3
425
Font name
Family
HP equivalent
Symbol set
Dutch 801
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
CG Times
2
Zapf Humanist 601
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
CG Omega
3
Ribbon 131
—
Coronet
3
Clarendon 701
—
Clarendon Condensed
3
Swiss 742
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Univers
2
Swiss 742 Condensed
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Univers Condensed
3
Incised 901
Medium, Bold, Italic
Antique Olive
3
Aldine 430
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Garamond
3
Calligraphic 401
—
Marigold
3
Flareserif 821
Medium, Extra Bold
Albertus
3
Swiss 721 SWM
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Arial
3
Dutch 801 SWM
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Times New
3
Swiss 721 SWA
Medium, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Oblique
Helvetica
3
Swiss 721 Narrow
SWA
Medium, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
3
Zapf Calligraphic 801
SWA
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Palatino
3
Geometric 711 SWA
Medium, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Italic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic
3
Revival 711 SWA
Light, Demi Bold, Light
Italic, Demi Bold Italic
ITC Bookman
3
426
Font name
Family
HP equivalent
Symbol set
Century 702 SWA
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
New Century Schoolbook
3
Dutch 801 SWA
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Times
3
Chancery 801 Medium
SWA Italic
—
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium
Italic
3
Symbol SWM
—
Symbol
4
More WingBats SWM
—
Wingdings
5
Ding Dings SWA
—
ITC Zapf Dingbats
6
Symbol SWA
—
SymbolPS
4
David BT
Medium, Bold
David
7
Narkis Tam BT
Medium, Bold
Narkis
7
Miryam BT
Medium, Bold, Italic
Miryam
7
Koufi BT
Medium, Bold
Koufi
8
Naskh BT
Medium, Bold
Naskh
8
Ryadh BT
Medium, Bold
Ryadh
8
Bitmap Font
Line Printer, Symbol set 9
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Symbol Sets
Your product can access a variety of symbol sets. Many of these symbol sets differ only in the
international characters specific to each language.
Note: Since most software handles fonts and symbols automatically, you may never need to adjust your
product settings. However, if you write your own product control programs, or if you use older software
that cannot control fonts, refer to these tables for details on the symbol sets.
When you consider which font to use, also consider which symbol set to combine with the font. Available
symbol sets vary depending on the mode and font you choose.
427
PCL5 Mode Symbol Sets
Symbol set Attribu Font classification
name
te
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/1 0N
Latin 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 11:
Swedish
0S
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 6:
ASCII
0U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 4:
United
Kingdom
1E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 69:
French
1F
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 29:
German
1G
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Legal
1U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/2 2N
Latin 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/4 4N
Latin 4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 17:
Spanish
2S
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Roman-9
4U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 60:
0D
Danish/Nor
wegian
Roman
Extension
0E
ISO 15:
Italian
0I
—
—
—
428
—
Symbol set Attribu Font classification
name
te
1
2
3
4
5
6
PS Math
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5M
—
—
—
ISO 8859/9 5N
Latin 5
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
3.1 Latin 5
5T
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Microsoft
Publishing
6J
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ventura
Math
6M
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO
8859/10
Latin 6
6N
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DeskTop
7J
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Math-8
8M
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Roman-8
8U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
3.1 Latin 2
9E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Pc1004
9J
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO
8859/15
Latin 9
9N
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-Turkish 9T
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
3.0 Latin 1
9U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PS Text
10J
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-8, Code 10U
Page 437
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
429
Symbol set Attribu Font classification
name
te
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-8 D/N
11U
Danish/Nor
wegian
—
—
—
—
—
MC Text
12J
—
—
—
—
—
PC-850
12U
Multilingual
—
—
—
—
—
Ventura
13J
Internationa
l
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PcEur858
13U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ventura US 14J
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Pi Font
15U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC852,
Latin 2
17U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Unicode 3.0 18N
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
Baltic
19L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
19U
3.1
Latin/Arabic
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-755
26U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-866,
Cyrillic
3R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Greek8
8G
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
Greek
9G
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
Cyrillic
9R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
430
—
Symbol set Attribu Font classification
name
te
1
2
3
4
PC-851,
Greek
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10G
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/5 10N
Cyrillic
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-8,
Greek
12G
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/7 12N
Greek
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-866
UKR
14R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Hebrew7
0H
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/8 7H
Hebrew
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Hebrew8
8H
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-862,
Hebrew
15H
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-862,
Hebrew
15Q
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Arabic8
8V
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
HPWARA
9V
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-864,
Arabic
10V
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Wingdings
579L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Symbol
19M
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ZapfDigbats 14L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
OCR A
0O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
OCR B
1O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
431
—
Symbol set Attribu Font classification
name
te
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
OCR B
Extension
3Q
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Code3-9
0Y
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
EAN/UPC
8Y
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
12
13
—
—
—
—
PCL6 Mode Symbol Sets
Symbol set
name
Attribute
Font classification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ISO Norwegian 4
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO Italian
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859-1
Latin 1
14
—
—
—
—
—
ISO Swedish
19
—
—
—
—
—
ASCII
21
—
—
—
ISO United
Kingdom
37
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO French
38
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO German
39
—
—
—
—
—
—
Legal
53
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859-2
Latin 2
78
—
—
—
—
—
ISO Spanish
83
—
—
—
—
—
—
Roman-9
149
—
—
—
—
—
—
PS Math
173
—
—
—
ISO 8859-9
Latin 5
174
—
—
—
—
—
432
—
—
Symbol set
name
Attribute
Windows 3.1
Latin 5
Font classification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
180
—
—
—
—
—
—
Microsoft
Publishing
202
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/10
Latin 6
206
—
—
—
—
—
DeskTop
234
—
—
—
—
—
Math-8
269
—
—
—
Roman-8
277
—
—
—
—
—
Windows 3.1
Latin 2
293
—
—
—
—
—
—
Pc1004
298
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859-15
Latin 9
302
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-Turkish
308
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows 3.0
309
—
—
—
—
—
—
PS Text
330
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-8
341
—
—
—
—
—
PC-8 D/N
373
—
—
—
—
—
MC Text
394
—
—
—
—
—
PC-850
405
—
—
—
—
—
PcEur858
437
—
—
—
—
—
—
Pi Font
501
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC852
565
—
—
—
—
—
—
Unicode 3.0
590
—
—
—
WBALT
620
—
—
—
433
—
—
—
—
—
Symbol set
name
Attribute
Windows 3.1
Latin 1
Font classification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
629
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-755
853
—
—
—
—
—
—
Wingdings
18540
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Symbol
621
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ZapfDigbats
460
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-866,
Cyrillic
114
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Greek8
263
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
Greek
295
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Windows
Cyrillic
306
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-851, Greek 327
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/5
Cyrillic
334
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-8, Greek
391
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/7
Greek
398
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-866 UKR
466
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Hebrew7
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ISO 8859/8
Hebrew
232
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Hebrew8
264
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-862,
Hebrew
488
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Arabic8
278
—
—
—
—
—
—
434
—
—
—
—
Symbol set
name
Attribute
HPWARA
Font classification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
310
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
PC-864, Arabic 342
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
435
8
9
Notices
Check these sections for important notices about your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life products. Please go to this site for information on
how to return your products for proper disposal.
General Product Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
Software Notice
Trademarks
Copyright Notice
General Product Safety Instructions
• Be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
• Use only the type of power source indicated on the product's label.
• Use only the power cord that comes with the product. Use of another cord may cause fires or shock.
Do not use the cord with any other equipment.
• Place the product near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.
• Avoid plugging the product into an outlet on the same circuit as a photo copier or air control system
that regularly switches on and off, or on an outlet controlled by a wall switch or timer.
• Do not let the power cord become damaged or frayed. Place it to avoid abrasions, cuts, fraying,
crimping, and kinking. Do not place objects on top of it and do not allow it to be stepped on or run over.
Be careful to keep the cord straight at each end.
• If you use an extension cord with the product, make sure the total ampere rating of the devices
plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the cord's ampere rating. Also, make sure the total
ampere rating of all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet's ampere
rating.
• Always turn off the product using the power button, and wait until the power light stops flashing before
unplugging the product or cutting off power to the electrical outlet.
• If you will not be using the product for a long period, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Place the product on a flat, stable surface that extends beyond its base in all directions. It will not
operate properly if it is tilted or at an angle.
436
• Allow space behind the product for the cables, and space above the product so that you can fully raise
the document cover.
• Leave enough space in front of the product for the paper to be fully ejected.
• Avoid locations that are subject to rapid changes in heat or humidity, shocks or vibrations, or dust.
• Do not place or store the product outdoors.
• Do not place the product near excessive heat sources or in direct sunlight.
• Leave enough room around the product for sufficient ventilation. Do not block or cover openings in the
case or insert objects through the slots.
• Keep the product away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference, such as loudspeakers
or the base units of cordless telephones.
• When connecting the product to a computer or other device with a cable, ensure the correct
orientation of the connectors. Each connector has only one correct orientation. Inserting a connector
in the wrong orientation may damage both devices connected by the cable.
• Do not touch the flat white cable inside the product.
• Do not move the print head by hand; this may damage the product.
• Do not spill liquid on the product or use the product with wet hands.
• Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the product. Doing so may
cause fire.
• Do not press too hard on the document table when placing originals.
• Do not open the scanner section while the product is copying, printing, scanning, or performing any
other functions.
• Be careful not to trap your fingers when closing the document cover or scanner.
• Except as specifically explained in your documentation, do not attempt to service the product yourself.
• Unplug the product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: if
the power cord or plug is damaged; if liquid has entered the product; if the product has been dropped
or the case damaged; if the product does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in
performance. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions.
• Leave the ink cartridges installed. Removing the cartridges can dehydrate the print head and may
prevent the product from printing.
• Before transporting the product, make sure that the print head is in the home (far right) position and
the ink cartridges are in place.
437
• When storing or transporting the product, do not tilt it, stand it on its side, or turn it upside down;
otherwise ink may leak.
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions
Cabinet Safety Instructions
Parent topic: Notices
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions
• Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
• Be careful when you handle used ink cartridges; there may be ink remaining around the ink supply
port. If ink gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If it gets in your eyes, flush them
immediately with water.
• Do not put your hand inside the product or touch any cartridges during printing.
• Install a new ink cartridge immediately after removing an expended one. Leaving cartridges
uninstalled can dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing.
• Do not remove or tear the label on the cartridge; this can cause leakage.
• Do not remove the transparent seal from the bottom of the cartridge. This may cause the cartridge to
become unusable.
• Do not break the hooks on the side of the cartridge when removing it from the packaging.
• Do not touch the green IC chip on the side of the cartridge. This may prevent normal operation.
• Do not shake cartridges after opening their packages; this can cause them to leak.
• If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in
the same environment as the product. Note that there is a valve in the ink supply port, making covers
or plugs unnecessary, but care is needed to prevent the ink from staining items that the cartridge
touches. Do not touch the ink cartridge ink supply port or surrounding area.
• Use an ink cartridge before the date printed on its package.
• Do not dismantle an ink cartridge. This could damage the print head.
• Store ink cartridges in a cool, dark place.
• After bringing an ink cartridge inside from a cold storage site, allow it to warm up at room temperature
for at least three hours before using it.
438
• Store ink cartridges with their labels facing upward. Do not store cartridges upside down.
Parent topic: General Product Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
• Use only a dry, soft cloth to clean the LCD screen. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers.
• If the LCD screen is damaged, contact Epson. If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands, wash
them thoroughly with soap and water. If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems remain after a thorough flushing, see a doctor
immediately.
• Do not press too hard on the LCD screen.
• Do not use a pointy or sharp object, such as a pen or your fingernail, to operate the LCD screen.
Parent topic: General Product Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
Radio waves from this product may adversely affect the operation of medical equipment or automatically
controlled devices, such as pacemakers, automatic doors or fire alarms. When using this product near
such devices or inside a medical facility, follow the directions from authorized staff members at the
facility, and follow all posted warnings and directions on the device to avoid causing an accident.
Parent topic: General Product Safety Instructions
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions
When using telephone equipment, you should always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock, and personal injury, including the following:
• Do not use the Epson product near water.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Caution: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
Parent topic: General Product Safety Instructions
439
Cabinet Safety Instructions
• Do not install any other product on the cabinet besides the printer and paper cassettes mentioned in
this manual.
• Do not climb on the cabinet or place heavy objects on it.
• Make sure the stands are securely attached to the cabinet or the product may fall over.
• Make sure the casters on the cabinet are locked when using the printer.
• Do not move the cabinet when the casters are locked.
• Avoid rolling the cabinet over uneven or rough surfaces with the printer installed.
Parent topic: General Product Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
For United States Users
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ("ACTA") . On the surface of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If
requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
Applicable certification jack Universal Service Order Codes ("USOC") for the equipment: RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant
telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a
compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001 , the REN for this product is part of the product
identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a
decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't practical,
the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
440
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance
notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you have problems with this product and require technical or customer support, please visit
www.epson.com for more information.
This product is not intended to be repaired by the customer. If you experience trouble connecting this
equipment to a telephone line, please contact:
Name: Epson America, Inc.
Address: 3840 Kilroy Airport Way, Long Beach, CA 90806 U.S.A.
Telephone: (562) 981-3840
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to
party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what
will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other
number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your fax machine, click the link below for instructions on entering
fax header information.
According to the FCC's electrical safety advisory, we recommend that you may install an AC surge
arrester in the AC outlet to which this equipment is connected. Telephone companies report that
electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment
connected to AC power sources and that this is a major nationwide problem.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
441
interference to radio or television reception. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC
Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits
established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded
equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do
not leave cables connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canadian Users
1. This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
2. The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent
être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Parent topic: Notices
Related tasks
Using the Fax Setup Wizard
442
Software Notice
1. This printer product includes open source software programs according to the license terms of each
open source software program.
2. We provide the source code of some of these open softwares until five (5) years after the
discontinuation of same model of this printer product. If you desire to receive the source code above,
please contact the customer support of your region. You shall comply with the license terms of each
open source software program.
3. The open source software programs are WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the license
agreements of each open source software program for more details, which are described below.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to
most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public
License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
443
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that
there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on,
we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free
use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright
holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program",
below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the
Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made
by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with
the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on
the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above,
provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
444
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the
user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not
normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by
you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works
based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a
work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other
work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source
code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and
445
so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place,
then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of
the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under
this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain
in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program
(or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its
terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients'
exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason
(not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of
this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all.
For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those
who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
446
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add
an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ
in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions
are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR
THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL
ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE
THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES
OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
447
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best
way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of
author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See
the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not,
write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY
NO WARRANTY; for details type 'show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type 'show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands 'show w' and 'show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General
Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than 'show w' and
'show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes
passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If
your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
448
applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead of this License.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library
Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations
below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can
do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this
license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they
449
have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems
that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make
sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive
license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the
library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License.
This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite
different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to
permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of
the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General
Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The
Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less
of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the
ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in
certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a
certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used
non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we
use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of
people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in nonfree programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant,
the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that
the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that
program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to
the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former
contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to
run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
450
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of
this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these
terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright
law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of
the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it,
in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on
the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above,
provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms
of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application
program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you
must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
451
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined
independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function
or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root
function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by
you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works
based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to
a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that
they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer
version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General
Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is
useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code
or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the
complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute
the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the
Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in
isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The
452
executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object
code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether
this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is
unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object
code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under
the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not
they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library"
with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms
of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and
reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the
Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of
these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library
including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2
above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable
"work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library
and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to
recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that
(1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than
copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the
library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version
that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
453
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent
access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this
user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials
to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library
together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library,
provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with
any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as
such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or
any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms
and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
454
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason
(not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of
this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For
example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who
receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the
Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions
are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted
by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
455
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR
THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL
ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE
THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by
permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of
author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser
General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License,
or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
456
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if
not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs)
written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled
by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i)
the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to
software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is
provided in the Appendix below).
457
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived
from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works
shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to
submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form
of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but
not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking
systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving
the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing
by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution
has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor
hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform,
sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as
stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise
transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor
that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with
the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution
incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent
licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is
filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in
any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the
following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
458
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the
Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE
file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text
from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the
License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally
submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this
License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall
supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor
regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service
marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in
describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides
the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation,
any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or
redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this
License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts)
or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect,
special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of
the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work
459
stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if
such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof,
You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other
liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations,
You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other
Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such
warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields
enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!)
The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend
that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the
copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations
under the License.
Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
460
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) ----Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the
name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
461
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
462
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A.
All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
463
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the
original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses
are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact
openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
--------------Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
464
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
====================================================================
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product
includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
----------------------Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation
was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is
covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If
this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the
library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online
or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
465
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used
are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the
GNU Public Licence.]
Copyright 2002 Sun Microsystems, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ECC cipher suite support in
OpenSSL originally developed by SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC., and contributed to the OpenSSL
project.
Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved.
The portions of the attached software ("Contribution") is developed by Nokia Corporation and is licensed
pursuant to the OpenSSL open source license.
The Contribution, originally written by Mika Kousa and Pasi Eronen of Nokia Corporation, consists of the
"PSK" (Pre-Shared Key) ciphersuites support (see RFC 4279) to OpenSSL.
No patent licenses or other rights except those expressly stated in the OpenSSL open source license
shall be deemed granted or received expressly, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise.
No assurances are provided by Nokia that the Contribution does not infringe the patent or other
intellectual property rights of any third party or that the license provides you with all the necessary rights
to make use of the Contribution.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. IN ADDITION TO
THE DISCLAIMERS INCLUDED IN THE LICENSE, NOKIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
466
LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY YOU OR ANY OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT
OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR OTHERWISE.
Portions of the attached software ("Contribution") are developed by SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC., and
are contributed to the OpenSSL project.
Copyright (c) 2004, Richard Levitte <richard@levitte.org> All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and is provided for unrestricted use provided that this
legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part. Users may
copy or modify Sun RPC without charge, but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyone else
except as part of a product or program developed by the user.
SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE
WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.
Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems, Inc. to
assist in its use, correction, modification or enhancement.
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR ANY PART THEREOF.
In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special, indirect
and consequential damages, even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View, California 94043
467
Generic DES driver interface
Keep this file hardware independent!
Copyright (c) 1986 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Copyright 2002 Sun Microsystems, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
The Elliptic Curve Public-Key Crypto Library (ECC Code) included herein is developed by SUN
MICROSYSTEMS, INC., and is contributed to the OpenSSL project.
The ECC Code is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL open source license provided below.
In addition, Sun covenants to all licensees who provide a reciprocal covenant with respect to their own
patents if any, not to sue under current and future patent claims necessarily infringed by the making,
using, practicing, selling, offering for sale and/or otherwise disposing of the ECC Code as delivered
hereunder (or portions thereof), provided that such covenant shall not apply:
1) for code that a licensee deletes from the ECC Code;
2) separates from the ECC Code; or
3) for infringements caused by:
i) the modification of the ECC Code or
ii) the combination of the ECC Code with other software or devices where such combination causes the
infringement.
The software is originally written by Sheueling Chang Shantz and Douglas Stebila of Sun Microsystems
Laboratories.
NOTE: This file is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL license below and may be modified; but after
modifications, the above covenant may no longer apply! In such cases, the corresponding paragraph ["In
addition, Sun covenants ... causes the infringement."] and this note can be edited out; but please keep
the Sun copyright notice and attribution.
Copyright Patrick Powell 1995
This code is based on code written by Patrick Powell <papowell@astart.com> It may be used for any
purpose as long as this notice remains intact on all source code distributions.
This code contains numerious changes and enhancements which were made by lots of contributors over
the last years to Patrick Powell's original code:
o Patrick Powell <papowell@astart.com> (1995)
o Brandon Long <blong@fiction.net> (1996, for Mutt)
o Thomas Roessler <roessler@guug.de> (1998, for Mutt)
o Michael Elkins <me@cs.hmc.edu> (1998, for Mutt)
468
o Andrew Tridgell <tridge@samba.org> (1998, for Samba)
o Luke Mewburn <lukem@netbsd.org> (1999, for LukemFTP)
o Ralf S. Engelschall <rse@engelschall.com> (1999, for Pth)
o ... (for OpenSSL)
Copyright (c) 2010-2010 Intel Corp.
Author: Vinodh.Gopal@intel.com
Jim Guilford
Erdinc.Ozturk@intel.com
Maxim.Perminov@intel.com
Ying.Huang@intel.com
Copyright (c) 2002 Bob Beck <beck@openbsd.org>
Copyright (c) 2002 Theo de Raadt
Copyright (c) 2002 Markus Friedl
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2011 Google Inc.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
469
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations
under the License.
Created 960901 by Gertjan van Oosten, gertjan@West.NL, West Consulting B.V.
Code adapted from
<URL:http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;[LN];97193>;
the original copyright message is:
(C) Copyright Microsoft Corp. 1993. All rights reserved.
You have a royalty-free right to use, modify, reproduce and distribute the Sample Files (and/or any
modified version) in any way you find useful, provided that you agree that Microsoft has no warranty
obligations or liability for any Sample Application Files which are modified.
Copyright (c) 2004 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan
(Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden).
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
470
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved.
The portions of the attached software ("Contribution") is developed by Nokia Corporation and is licensed
pursuant to the OpenSSL open source license.
The Contribution, originally written by Mika Kousa and Pasi Eronen of Nokia Corporation, consists of the
"PSK" (Pre-Shared Key) ciphersuites support (see RFC 4279) to OpenSSL.
No patent licenses or other rights except those expressly stated in the OpenSSL open source license
shall be deemed granted or received expressly, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise.
No assurances are provided by Nokia that the Contribution does not infringe the patent or other
intellectual property rights of any third party or that the license provides you with all the necessary rights
to make use of the Contribution.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. IN ADDITION TO
THE DISCLAIMERS INCLUDED IN THE LICENSE, NOKIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY YOU OR ANY OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT
OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR OTHERWISE.
Copyright (C) 2006, Network Resonance, Inc.
Copyright (C) 2011, RTFM, Inc.
Copyright@2001 Baltimore Technologies Ltd.
THIS FILE IS PROVIDED BY BALTIMORE TECHNOLOGIES "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL BALTIMORE TECHNOLOGIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2000 Broadcom Corporation
This file is Copyright 1998-2000 nCipher Corporation Limited.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with opr without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
471
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and
the following disclaimer, in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution
IN NO EVENT SHALL NCIPHER CORPORATION LIMITED (`NCIPHER') AND/OR ANY OTHER
AUTHORS OR DISTRIBUTORS OF THIS FILE BE LIABLE for any damages arising directly or indirectly
from this file, its use or this licence. Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing: all liability shall
be excluded for direct, indirect, special, incidental, consequential or other damages or any loss of profits,
business, revenue goodwill or anticipated savings; liability shall be excluded even if nCipher or anyone
else has been advised of the possibility of damage. In any event, if the exclusion of liability is not
effective, the liability of nCipher or any author or distributor shall be limited to the lesser of the price paid
and 1,000 pounds sterling. This licence only fails to exclude or limit liability for death or personal injury
arising out of negligence, and only to the extent that such an exclusion or limitation is not effective.
NCIPHER AND THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL AND ANY
WARRANTIES (WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), including, but not limited to, any implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, satisfactory quality, and/or noninfringement of any third party rights.
US Government use: This software and documentation is Commercial Computer Software and
Computer Software Documentation, as defined in sub-paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(5) of DFAR 252.2277014, "Rights in Noncommercial Computer Software and Noncommercial Computer Software
Documentation." Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to the terms and conditions
specified here.
By using or distributing this file you will be accepting these terms and conditions, including the limitation
of liability and lack of warranty. If you do not wish to accept these terms and conditions, DO NOT USE
THE FILE.
The actual dynamically loadable plugin, and the library files for static linking, which are also provided in
some distributions, are not covered by the licence described above. You should have received a
separate licence with terms and conditions for these library files; if you received the library files without a
licence, please contact nCipher.
Copyright (c) 2005-2006 Cryptocom LTD
Written by Corinne Dive-Reclus(cdive@baltimore.com)
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
472
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.OpenSSL.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact licensing@OpenSSL.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.OpenSSL.org/)"
Written by Corinne Dive-Reclus(cdive@baltimore.com)
Copyright@2001 Baltimore Technologies Ltd. All right Reserved.
THIS FILE IS PROVIDED BY BALTIMORE TECHNOLOGIES "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL BALTIMORE TECHNOLOGIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
473
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (C) Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and is provided for unrestricted use provided that this
legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part. Users may
copy or modify Sun RPC without charge, but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyone else
except as part of a product or program developed by the user or with the express written consent of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE
WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.
Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems, Inc. to
assist in its use, correction, modification or enhancement.
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR ANY PART THEREOF.
In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special, indirect
and consequential damages, even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Sun Microsystems, Inc. 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View, California 94043
Copyright (c) 2001-2006, Gerrit Pape All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
474
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 1989 - 1991, Julianne Frances Haugh <jockgrrl@austin.rr.com> All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The Clarified Artistic License
Preamble
The intent of this document is to state the conditions under which a Package may be copied, such that
the Copyright Holder maintains some semblance of artistic control over the development of the package,
while giving the users of the package the right to use and distribute the Package in a more-or-less
customary fashion, plus the right to make reasonable modifications.
Definitions:
475
"Package" refers to the collection of files distributed by the Copyright Holder, and derivatives of that
collection of files created through textual modification.
"Standard Version" refers to such a Package if it has not been modified, or has been modified in
accordance with the wishes of the Copyright Holder as specified below.
"Copyright Holder" is whoever is named in the copyright or copyrights for the package.
"You" is you, if you're thinking about copying or distributing this Package.
"Distribution fee" is a fee you charge for providing a copy of this Package to another party.
"Freely Available" means that no fee is charged for the right to use the item, though there may be fees
involved in handling the item. It also means that recipients of the item may redistribute it under the same
conditions they received it.
1. You may make and give away verbatim copies of the source form of the Standard Version of this
Package without restriction, provided that you duplicate all of the original copyright notices and
associated disclaimers.
2. You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications derived from the Public Domain, or
those made Freely Available, or from the Copyright Holder. A Package modified in such a way shall still
be considered the Standard Version.
3. You may otherwise modify your copy of this Package in any way, provided that you insert a prominent
notice in each changed file stating how and when you changed that file, and provided that you do at least
ONE of the following:
a) place your modifications in the Public Domain or otherwise make them Freely Available, such as by
posting said modifications to Usenet or an equivalent medium, or placing the modifications on a major
network archive site allowing unrestricted access to them, or by allowing the Copyright Holder to include
your modifications in the Standard Version of the Package.
b) use the modified Package only within your corporation or organization.
c) rename any non-standard executables so the names do not conflict with standard executables, which
must also be provided, and provide a separate manual page for each non-standard executable that
clearly documents how it differs from the Standard Version.
d) make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder.
e) permit and encourage anyone who receives a copy of the modified Package permission to make your
modifications Freely Available in some specific way.
4. You may distribute the programs of this Package in object code or executable form, provided that you
do at least ONE of the following:
a) distribute a Standard Version of the executables and library files, together with instructions (in the
manual page or equivalent) on where to get the Standard Version.
476
b) accompany the distribution with the machine-readable source of the Package with your modifications.
c) give non-standard executables non-standard names, and clearly document the differences in manual
pages (or equivalent), together with instructions on where to get the Standard Version.
d) make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder.
e) offer the machine-readable source of the Package, with your modifications, by mail order.
5. You may charge a distribution fee for any distribution of this Package. If you offer support for this
Package, you may charge any fee you choose for that support. You may not charge a license fee for the
right to use this Package itself. You may distribute this Package in aggregate with other (possibly
commercial and possibly nonfree) programs as part of a larger (possibly commercial and possibly
nonfree) software distribution, and charge license fees for other parts of that software distribution,
provided that you do not advertise this Package as a product of your own. If the Package includes an
interpreter, You may embed this Package's interpreter within an executable of yours (by linking); this
shall be construed as a mere form of aggregation, provided that the complete Standard Version of the
interpreter is so embedded.
6. The scripts and library files supplied as input to or produced as output from the programs of this
Package do not automatically fall under the copyright of this Package, but belong to whoever generated
them, and may be sold commercially, and may be aggregated with this Package. If such scripts or library
files are aggregated with this Package via the so-called "undump" or "unexec" methods of producing a
binary executable image, then distribution of such an image shall neither be construed as a distribution
of this Package nor shall it fall under the restrictions of Paragraphs 3 and 4, provided that you do not
represent such an executable image as a Standard Version of this Package.
7. C subroutines (or comparably compiled subroutines in other languages) supplied by you and linked
into this Package in order to emulate subroutines and variables of the language defined by this Package
shall not be considered part of this Package, but are the equivalent of input as in Paragraph 6, provided
these subroutines do not change the language in any way that would cause it to fail the regression tests
for the language.
8. Aggregation of the Standard Version of the Package with a commercial distribution is always
permitted provided that the use of this Package is embedded; that is, when no overt attempt is made to
make this Package's interfaces visible to the end user of the commercial distribution. Such use shall not
be construed as a distribution of this Package.
9. The name of the Copyright Holder may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
10. THIS PACKAGE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
The End
477
Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1993 by Chris Thewalt (thewalt@ce.berkeley.edu)
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notices appear in all copies and that both the copyright notice
and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without
express or implied warranty.
Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2001). All Rights Reserved.
This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to others, and derivative works that
comment on or otherwise explain it or assist in its implementation may be prepared, copied, published
and distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any kind, provided that the above copyright
notice and this paragraph are included on all such copies and derivative works. However, this document
itself may not be modified in any way, such as by removing the copyright notice or references to the
Internet Society or other Internet organizations, except as needed for the purpose of developing Internet
standards in which case the procedures for copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process must be
followed, or as required to translate it into languages other than English.
The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be revoked by the Internet Society or
its successors or assigns.
This document and the information contained herein is provided on an "AS IS" basis and THE
INTERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT
THE USE OF THE INFORMATION HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
This is version 2007-Mar-4 of the Info-ZIP license. The definitive version of this document should be
available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely and a copy at http://www.infozip.org/pub/infozip/license.html.
Copyright © 1990-2007 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as the following set of individuals:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter
Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan
Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve
P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve
Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul
von Behren, Rich Wales, Mike White.
This software is provided "as is," without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall InfoZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages
arising out of the use of or inability to use this software.
478
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the above disclaimer and the following restrictions:
1. Redistributions of source code (in whole or in part) must retain the above copyright notice, definition,
disclaimer, and this list of conditions.
2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables and libraries) must reproduce the above
copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution. The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a standard
UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as part of a self-extracting archive; that is permitted without
inclusion of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or
disabled.
3. Altered versions--including, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports with new
graphical interfaces, versions with modified or added functionality, and dynamic, shared, or static library
versions not from Info-ZIP--must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being
the original source or, if binaries, compiled from the original source. Such altered versions also must not
be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releases--including, but not limited to, labeling of the altered
versions with the names "Info-ZIP" (or any variation thereof, including, but not limited to, different
capitalizations), "Pocket UnZip," "WiZ" or "MacZip" without the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or the Info-ZIP URL(s), such as to imply Info-ZIP will provide support for the altered versions.
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names "Info-ZIP," "Zip," "UnZip," "UnZipSFX," "WiZ," "Pocket
UnZip," "Pocket Zip," and "MacZip" for its own source and binary releases.
Copyright (C) The Internet Society 1999. All Rights Reserved.
This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to others, and derivative works that
comment on or otherwise explain it or assist in its implementation may be prepared, copied, published
and distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any kind, provided that the above copyright
notice and this paragraph are included on all such copies and derivative works. However, this document
itself may not be modified in any way, such as by removing the copyright notice or references to the
Internet Society or other Internet organisations, except as needed for the purpose of developing Internet
standards in which case the procedures for copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process shall be
followed, or as required to translate it into languages other than English.
The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be revoked by the Internet Society or
its successors or assigns. This document and the information contained herein is provided on an "AS IS"
basis and THE INTERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY
THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Copyright (c) 2005 JSON.org
479
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
The Software shall be used for Good, not Evil.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security,
Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this
function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as
"derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or
referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software
or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is allowed without the payment of
fees or royalties provided that:
1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer;
2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in their documentation;
480
3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built using this software without
specific written permission.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its properties,
including, but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.
The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is distinguished by a
version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of
any subsequent revision of the license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR
THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright
in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2012 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights Reserved.
Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.
Copyright (C) 2000 Pierangelo Masarati, <ando@sys-net.it> All rights reserved.
481
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose on any computer system, and to
alter it and redistribute it, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The author is not responsible for the consequences of use of this software, no matter how awful, even
if they arise from flaws in it.
2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented, either by explicit claim or by omission. Since
few users ever read sources, credits should appear in the documentation.
3. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the
original software. Since few users ever read sources, credits should appear in the documentation.
4. This notice may not be removed or altered.
Copyright 2004, 2005,2011 Howard Chu, Symas Corp. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 Martin Hedenfalk <martin@bzero.se>
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved
and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor. The name of the University may
not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission. This software is provided "as is'' without express or implied warranty.
Copyright (c) 2009 by Matthew Backes, Symas Corp. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright 1995, 2001-2003 IBM Corporation. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright (c) 1996, 1998 by Internet Software Consortium.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTERNET SOFTWARE
CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
482
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
Copyright 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001 Computing Research Labs, New Mexico State University
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COMPUTING RESEARCH LAB OR NEW MEXICO STATE UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
UCD Terms of Use (http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UCD.html)
Disclaimer
The Unicode Character Database is provided as is by Unicode, Inc. No claims are made as to fitness for
any particular purpose. No warranties of any kind are expressed or implied. The recipient agrees to
determine applicability of information provided. If this file has been purchased on magnetic or optical
media from Unicode, Inc., the sole remedy for any claim will be exchange of defective media within 90
days of receipt.
This disclaimer is applicable for all other data files accompanying the Unicode Character Database,
some of which have been compiled by the Unicode Consortium, and some of which have been supplied
by other sources.
Limitations on Rights to Redistribute This Data
Recipient is granted the right to make copies in any form for internal distribution and to freely use the
information supplied in the creation of products supporting the Unicode (TM) Standard. The files in the
Unicode Character Database can be redistributed to third parties or other organizations (whether for
profit or not) as long as this notice and the disclaimer notice are retained. Information can be extracted
from these files and used in documentation or programs, as long as there is an accompanying notice
indicating the source.
483
Portions Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
THIS WORK IS SUBJECT TO U.S. AND INTERNATIONAL COPYRIGHT LAWS AND TREATIES. USE,
MODIFICATION, AND REDISTRIBUTION OF THIS WORK IS SUBJECT TO VERSION 2.0.1 OF THE
OPENLDAP PUBLIC LICENSE, A COPY OF WHICH IS AVAILABLE AT
HTTP://WWW.OPENLDAP.ORG/LICENSE.HTML OR IN THE FILE "LICENSE" IN THE TOP-LEVEL
DIRECTORY OF THE DISTRIBUTION. ANY USE OR EXPLOITATION OF THIS WORK OTHER THAN
AS AUTHORIZED IN VERSION 2.0.1 OF THE OPENLDAP PUBLIC LICENSE, OR OTHER PRIOR
WRITTEN CONSENT FROM NOVELL, COULD SUBJECT THE PERPETRATOR TO CRIMINAL AND
CIVIL LIABILITY.
Copyright 1999, Juan C. Gomez, All rights reserved. This software is not subject to any license of Silicon
Graphics Inc. or Purdue University.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted without restriction or fee of any kind as
long as this notice is preserved.
Portions Copyright (c) 1987 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice
and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials,
and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed
by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE
IS PROVIDED "AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
484
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Portions Copyright 2008 Pierangelo Masarati. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2000-2001, Aaron D. Gifford All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTOR(S) "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2011 Devin J. Pohly
Portions Copyright 2008, 2009, 2011 Howard Chu
Copyright 2008 Emmanuel Dreyfus. All rights reserved.
Copyright 2009 Jonathan Clarke <jonathan@phillipoux.net>. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright 2004 by IBM Corporation. All rights reserved.
Copyright 2004 Sang Seok Lim, IBM Corp. All Rights Reserved.
Portions Copyright 2007 Micha? Szulczy?ski. All rights reserved.
Copyright 1991-1996 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans.
485
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies. Karl
Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans make no representations about the suitability of this software for any
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Copyright (c) 1998-1999 NeoSoft, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This software may be used, modified, copied, distributed, and sold, in both source and binary form
provided that these copyrights are retained and their terms are followed.
Under no circumstances are the authors or NeoSoft Inc. responsible for the proper functioning of this
software, nor do the authors assume any liability for damages incurred with its use.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved
and that due credit is given to NeoSoft, Inc.
NeoSoft, Inc. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. This software is provided "as is'' without express or implied warranty.
Requests for permission may be sent to NeoSoft Inc, 1770 St. James Place, Suite 500, Houston, TX,
77056.
Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Kurt D. Zeilenga.
Portions Copyright 1998-2001 Net Boolean Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright 2008 Pierangelo Masarati, SysNet All rights reserved.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, and 1999 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
486
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (C) 2004-2006 Emmanuel Dreyfus All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project.
Copyright (C) 2008 Timo Teras <timo.teras@iki.fi>. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
487
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2000 Wasabi Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
This software was written by Frank van der Linden of Wasabi Systems for Zembu Labs, Inc.
http://www.zembu.com/
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of Wasabi Systems, Inc. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY WASABI SYSTEMS, INC. "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL WASABI SYSTEMS, INC BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (C) 2004 SuSE Linux AG, Nuernberg, Germany.
Contributed by: Michal Ludvig <mludvig@suse.cz>, SUSE Labs All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
488
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (C) 2004 SuSE Linux AG, Nuernberg, Germany.
Contributed by: Michal Ludvig <mludvig@suse.cz>, SUSE Labs All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
489
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project.
Copyright (C) 2008 Timo Teras. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (C) 2005 International Business Machines Corporation
Copyright (c) 2005 by Trusted Computer Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
490
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Parent topic: Notices
Trademarks
EPSON® and Supplies Central® are registered trademarks, EPSON Exceed Your Vision is a registered
logomark, and Epson ConnectTM is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Epson StoreSM is a service mark of Epson America, Inc.
Epson iPrintTM and Remote PrintTM are trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Apple, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Google is a registered trademark and Android, Chromebook, Google Chrome, Google Cloud Print, and
Google Drive are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi Direct® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Parent topic: Notices
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. The information contained herein is
designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as
applied to other products.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third
parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of:
491
accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this
product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and
maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any
options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson
Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic
interference that occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson
approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
This information is subject to change without notice.
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
Copyright Attribution
Parent topic: Notices
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose
is hereby granted without fee, provided that (I) the above copyright notices and this permission notice
appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and
Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the
specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
492
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any
Epson product. While some countries' laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in
certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume. Contact your
legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
This product will enter sleep mode after a period of nonuse. This is to ensure that the product meets
Energy Star standards of energy efficiency. More energy savings can be achieved by setting the time to
sleep to a shorter interval.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Copyright Attribution
© 2014 Epson America, Inc.
12/14
CPD-40373
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
493